Lenovo Server 3724 User Manual

Installation and User Guide  
ThinkServer TD200  
Machine Types: 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, and 3836  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815,  
3817, 3824, 3826, 3836  
Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, “Notices,” on page 191  
and the Warranty and Support Information document on ThinkServer Documentation DVD.  
First Edition (June 2009)  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009.  
Portions © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009.  
LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and  
are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights  
to use, reproduction and disclosure.  
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered  
pursuant a General Services Administration GSAcontract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions  
set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety  
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.  
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.  
Pred instalací tohoto produktu si prectete prírucku bezpecnostních instrukcí.  
Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.  
Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.  
Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.  
Avant d’installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.  
Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.  
Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.  
Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.  
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.  
Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.  
Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important:  
All caution and danger statements in this documentation begin with a number. This  
number is used to cross reference an English caution or danger statement with  
translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety Information  
book.  
For example, if a caution statement begins with a number 1, translations for that  
caution statement appear in the Safety Information document under statement 1.  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this documentation before  
performing the instructions. Read any additional safety information that comes with  
the blade server or optional device before you install the device.  
viii ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 1:  
DANGER  
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is  
hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,  
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical  
storm.  
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical  
outlet.  
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to  
this product.  
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal  
cables.  
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or  
structural damage.  
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,  
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless  
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.  
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when  
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached  
devices.  
To Connect:  
To Disconnect:  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
Safety ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only a battery recommended by the  
manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery,  
replace it only with the same module type made by the same manufacturer.  
The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or  
disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
x
ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or  
transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could  
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable  
parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than  
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly  
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
Safety xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 4:  
18 kg (39.7 lb)  
32 kg (70.5 lb)  
55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
2
1
xii ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 8:  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following  
label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any  
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside  
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact  
a service technician.  
Statement 11:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates sharp edges, corners, or joints nearby.  
Statement 12:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.  
Safety xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 13:  
DANGER  
Overloading a branch circuit is potentially a fire hazard and a shock hazard  
under certain conditions. To avoid these hazards, ensure that your system  
electrical requirements do not exceed branch circuit protection  
requirements. Refer to the information that is provided with your device for  
electrical specifications.  
Statement 15:  
CAUTION:  
Make sure that the rack is secured properly to avoid tipping when the server  
unit is extended.  
Statement 17:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates moving parts nearby.  
xiv ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 26:  
CAUTION:  
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.  
This server is suitable for use on an IT power-distribution system whose maximum  
phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault condition.  
Important: This product is not suitable for use with visual display workplace  
devices according to Clause 2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual  
Display Units.  
Safety xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
This Installation and User Guide contains information and instructions for setting up  
your ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836  
server, instructions for installing optional devices, and instructions for cabling and  
configuring the server. For removing and installing optional devices, diagnostics and  
troubleshooting information, see the Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
The ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836 is  
a 5-U-high, high-performance server. This server is ideally suited for networking  
environments that require superior microprocessor performance, input/output (I/O)  
flexibility, and manageability.  
Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key  
considerations in the design of the server. These design features make it possible  
for you to customize the system hardware to meet your needs today and provide  
flexible expansion capabilities for the future.  
The server comes with a limited warranty. For information about the terms of the  
warranty and getting service and assistance, see the Warranty and Support  
Information document.  
Some server models support four 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA hard disk drives, or  
four 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or SATA hard disk drives, or eight 2.5-inch hot-swap  
SAS or SATA hard disk drives. The illustrations in this document might differ slightly  
from your model.  
If firmware and documentation updates are available, you can download them from  
http://www.lenovo.com. The server might have features that are not described in the  
documentation that comes with the server, and the documentation might be updated  
occasionally to include information about those features, or technical updates might  
be available to provide additional information that is not included in the server  
documentation. To check for updates, do the following:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. Procedures for  
locating firmware and documentation might vary slightly from what is described in  
this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
Record information about the server in the following table.  
Product name  
Machine type  
Model number  
Serial number  
ThinkServer TD200  
3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836  
_____________________________________________  
_____________________________________________  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The model number and serial number are on the lower right side of the bezel. ꢀ1ꢁ  
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.  
The server comes with the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD to help you configure the  
hardware and install the operating system.  
Important: The server keys cannot be duplicated by a locksmith. If you lose them,  
order replacement keys from the key manufacturer. The key serial number and the  
telephone number of the manufacturer are on a tag that is attached to the keys.  
Notices and statements in this document  
The caution and danger statements in this document are also in the multilingual  
Safety Information document, which is on the Lenovo ThinkServer Documentation  
DVD. Each statement is numbered for reference to the corresponding statement in  
your language in the Safety Information document.  
The following notices and statements are used in this document:  
v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.  
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid  
inconvenient or problem situations.  
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or  
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which  
damage might occur.  
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous  
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially  
hazardous procedure step or situation.  
2
ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or  
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the  
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or  
situation.  
Related documentation  
The Lenovo ThinkServer Documentation DVD contains documentation for the  
server in Portable Document Format (PDF). The Lenovo ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD requires Adobe® Acrobat Reader 5.0 (or later) or xpdf, which  
comes with Linux® operating systems.  
The following table describes the content and location of documentation that is  
provided with your server.  
Document  
Description  
Location  
Read Me First  
This document directs you to the  
ThinkServer Documentation DVD for  
printed, provided  
in server  
complete warranty and support information. packaging  
Important Notices  
This document includes safety and legal  
notices that you are expected to read  
before using the server.  
printed, provided  
in server  
packaging  
Hardware Maintenance  
Manual  
This document provides diagnostic  
information, parts listing, and replacement Web site:  
Lenovo Support  
procedures for all field replaceable units  
(parts replaced by trained service  
personnel) as well as all customer  
replaceable units (CRUs).  
Warranty and Support  
Information  
This document includes the warranty  
statement and information about how to  
contact Lenovo Support.  
Available on the  
ThinkServer  
Documentation  
DVD.  
Safety Information  
This document includes translations of all  
of the safety statements used in the  
ThinkServer documentation.  
Available on the  
ThinkServer  
Documentation  
DVD.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. Server setup roadmap  
The installation process varies depending on the configuration of the server when it  
was delivered. In some cases, the server is fully configured and just needs to be  
installed in the rack, connected to power and the network, and started. In other  
cases, the server needs to have hardware features installed, requires hardware and  
firmware configuration, and required the operating system to be installed.  
Task  
Where to find information  
Unpack  
Install hardware  
features  
Connect Ethernet cable “Rear view” on page 26  
and power cords to  
network and power  
connectors  
Review UEFI settings  
and customize as  
needed.  
Configure RAID  
controllers and arrays  
and basic drivers  
Install any additional  
drivers needed for  
added features  
Refer to the instructions that came with the hardware option.  
Configure Ethernet  
settings in operating  
system  
See the operating-system help. This step is not required if the  
operating system was installed using the EasyStartup program.  
Check for firmware and See the Lenovo Support Web site:  
driver updates.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number)  
or select Servers and Storage from the Select your product  
list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click  
Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
presence of the virtual  
media key option)  
Install integrated  
management  
applications  
Install applications  
Refer to the documentation that accompanies the applications that  
you want to install.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server  
The TD200 server package includes the server, power cords, and the ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Server  
Shipgroup box containing power cords and theThinkServer Documentation DVD  
Features and technologies  
The server uses the following features and technologies:  
v Integrated Management Module  
The Integrated Management Module (IMM) combines service processor  
functions, video controller, and (when an optional virtual media key is installed)  
remote presence function in a single chip. The IMM provides advanced  
service-processor control, monitoring, and alerting function. If an environmental  
condition exceeds a threshold or if a system component fails, the IMM lights  
LEDs to help you diagnose the problem, records the error in the event log, and  
alerts you to the problem. Optionally, the IMM also provides a virtual presence  
capability for remote server management capabilities. The IMM provides remote  
server management through the following industry-standard interfaces:  
– Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) version 2.0  
– Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3  
– Common Information Model (CIM)  
– Web browser  
v UEFI-compliant server firmware  
The UEFI-compliant server firmware offers several features, including Unified  
Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) version 2.1 compliance, enhanced  
reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) capabilities, and basic input/output  
system (BIOS) compatibility support. UEFI replaces the legacy BIOS. UEFI  
defines a standard interface between the operating system, platform firmware  
and external devices, and offers capabilities that far exceeds that of the legacy  
BIOS.  
The server design combines the UEFI capabilities and features with legacy BIOS  
compatibility. The server is capable of booting UEFI-compliant operating systems,  
BIOS-based operating systems, and BIOS-based adapters as well as  
UEFI-compliant adapters.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The server does not support Disk Operating System (DOS).  
v Preboot diagnostics program  
The preboot diagnostics programs are stored on the integrated USB memory.  
They collect and analyze system information to aid in diagnosing server  
problems. The diagnostics programs collect the following information about the  
server:  
– System configuration  
– Network interfaces and settings  
– Installed hardware  
– EasyLED status  
– Service processor status and configuration  
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI (formerly called BIOS) configuration  
– Hard disk drive health  
– RAID controller configuration  
– Event logs for RAID controllers and service processors  
The diagnostics programs create a merged log that includes events from all  
collected logs. The information is collected into a file that you can send to service  
and support. Additionally, you can view the information locally through a  
generated text report file. You can also copy the log to a removable media and  
view the log from a Web browser.  
For additional information about diagnostics, see the Hardware Maintenance  
Manual.  
v High-performance graphics controller  
The server comes with an onboard high-performance graphics controller that  
supports high resolutions and includes many performance-enhancing features for  
the operating-system environment.  
v Integrated network support  
The server comes with an integrated dual-port Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet  
controller, which supports connection to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps  
network. For more information, see “Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet  
v Integrated Trusted Platform Module (TPM)  
This integrated security chip performs cryptographic functions and stores private  
and public secure keys. It provides the hardware support for the Trusted  
Computing Group (TCG) specification. You can download the software to support  
the TCG specification, when the software is available. You can enable TPM  
support through the Setup Utility under the System Security menu option.  
v Large data-storage capacity and hot-swap capabilities  
Some hot-swap server models support eight slim-high, 2.5-inch hot-swap hard  
disk drives or four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives (depending on the model).  
With the hot-swap feature, you can add, remove, or replace hard disk drives  
without turning off the server.  
v Large system-memory capacity  
The server supports up to 48 GB (reduced to 24 GB in mirroring mode) of  
system memory. The memory controller supports error correcting code (ECC) for  
up to 12 industry-standard PC3-10600R-999 (single-rank or dual-rank), 800,  
1067, and 1333 MHz, DDR3 (third-generation double-data-rate), registered,  
synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory  
modules (DIMMs).  
v Memory mirroring  
8
ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some models support memory mirroring. Memory mirroring replicates and stores  
data on two pairs of DIMMs within two channels (channel 0 and 1)  
simultaneously. If a failure occurs, the memory controller switches from the  
primary pair of memory DIMMs to the backup pair of DIMMs. To support memory  
mirroring, you must install a pair of DIMMs at a time. One DIMM must be in  
channel 0, and the mirroring DIMM must be in the same slot in channel 1. For  
more information, see 91.  
v RAID support  
The ServeRAID adapter provides hardware redundant array of independent disks  
(RAID) support to create configurations. The standard RAID adapter provides  
RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E. The optional RAID adapters are available for purchase  
and provide RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60. See “Installing an adapter” on  
information about supported adapters and creating RAID arrays.  
v Symmetric multiprocessing (SMP)  
The server supports up to two Intel Xeon microprocessors. Each microprocessor  
provides symmetric multiprocessing capability. When you install the second  
microprocessor, this will enhance the performance of the server.  
v Systems-management capabilities  
The server comes with an integrated management module (IMM). When the IMM  
is used with the systems-management software that comes with the server, you  
can manage the functions of the server locally and remotely. The IMM also  
provides system monitoring, event recording, and network alert capability. The  
systems-management connector on the rear of the server is dedicated to the  
IMM. The dedicated systems-management connector provides additional security  
by physically separating the management network traffic from the production  
network. You can use the Setup Utility to configure the server to use a dedicated  
systems-management network or a shared network.  
v TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) support  
The Ethernet controllers in the server support TOE, which is a technology that  
offloads the TCP/IP flow from the microprocessor and I/O subsystem to increase  
the speed of the TCP/IP flow. When an operating system that supports TOE is  
running on the server and TOE is enabled, the server supports TOE operation.  
See the operating-system documentation for information about enabling TOE.  
The Windows operating system requires that the Windows Scalable Network  
Pack (SNP) be installed for TOE support.  
Note: As of the date of this document, the Linux operating system does not  
support TOE.  
Specifications  
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications for  
machine types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836. Depending on the  
server model, some features might not be available, or some specifications might  
not apply.  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Features and specifications  
Microprocessor:  
Fans:  
RAID controllers:  
v
Supports up to two Intel® Pentium®  
dual-core or quad-core microprocessors  
(one installed) with integrated memory  
controller and QuickPath Interconnect  
(QPI) architecture. The second  
microprocessor comes with a pluggable  
VRM  
Designed for LGA 1366 socket  
Scalable up to four cores  
32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB data  
cache, and 8 MB cache that is shared  
among the cores  
Three speed-controlled hot-swap fans  
v
v
v
A ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter  
that provides RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E  
(comes standard on some hot-swap  
SAS and hot-swap SATA models).  
Power supply: One 670 watt (100 - 240 V  
ac)  
An optional ServeRAID-MR10i  
SAS/SATA adapter that provides RAID  
levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 can  
also be ordered.  
Size:  
v
v
v
v
Height: 440 mm (17.3 in.)  
Depth: 767 mm (30.2 in.)  
Width: 218 mm (8.6 in.)  
Weight: 20 kg (42 lb) to 34 kg (75 lb)  
depending upon configuration  
v
v
v
An optional ServeRAID-MR10is  
SAS/SATA adapter that provides RAID  
levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 can  
also be ordered.  
v
Support for Intel Extended Memory 64  
Technology (EM64T)  
Note:  
v
Use the Setup Utility to determine the  
type and speed of the microprocessors.  
v
For a list of supported microprocessors,  
Memory:  
v
Minimum: 2 GB  
Maximum: 48 GB (24 GB in mirrored  
mode)  
v
v
Types: PC3-10600R-900 (single-rank or  
dual-rank, 800, 1066, and 1333 MHz,  
ECC, DDR3 registered SDRAM DIMMs  
only)  
v
v
Connectors: twelve dual inline memory  
module (DIMM) connectors, two-way  
interleaved  
Supports 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB  
(when available)  
10 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Features and specifications (continued)  
Drives (depending on the model): Integrated functions:  
Acoustical noise emissions:  
v
Optical drives: SATA  
Hard disk drives: SAS and SATA  
v
Integrated Management Module (IMM),  
which provides service processor  
control and monitoring functions, video  
controller, and (when the optional virtual  
media key is installed) remote  
keyboard, video, mouse, and remote  
hard disk drive capabilities  
Broadcom BCM5709 Gb Ethernet  
controller with TCP/IP Offload Engine  
(TOE) and Wake on LAN® support  
Onboard SATA controller (simple-swap  
models)  
Seven Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0  
ports (two front and four rear of the  
chassis), and one for the internal USB  
tape drive.  
Two Ethernet ports  
One System Management RJ-45 on the  
rear to connect to a  
systems-management network. This  
systems-management connector is  
dedicated to the IMM functions. This  
connector is active with or without the  
optional Virtual Media Key installed.  
One serial port  
Six SATA ports (four through the iPASS  
connector for simple-swap drives and  
two for the optical drives)  
v
Sound power, idling: 5.5 bel  
Sound power, operating: 6.0 bel  
v
v
Drive bays (depending on the model):  
v
Environment:  
Air temperature:  
Three 5.25-in. bays (one half-high  
DVD-ROM drive installed). Optionally  
you can install one full-high or two  
half-high internal tape drives in bays 2  
and 3.  
v
Server on: 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)  
Altitude: 0 to 915 m (3000 ft)  
Server on: 10° to 32°C (50° to 90°F)  
Altitude: 0 to 915 m (3000 ft) to 2134  
m (7000 ft)  
v
v
One of the following:  
Four 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA  
drives  
Four 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or SATA  
drives  
Eight 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS or  
SATA drives  
Server on: 10° to 28°C (50° to 83°F)  
Altitude: 2134 m (7000 ft) to 3050 m  
(10000 ft)  
v
v
Server off: 5° to 45°C (41.0° to  
113°F)  
Shipping: -40° to 60°C (-40° to  
140°F)  
v
v
v
Humidity (operating and storage):  
Server on: 20% to 80%, Maximum  
dew point 21°C, Maximum rate of  
change 5°C/hr.  
Server off: 8% to 80%, Maximum  
dew point 27°C  
Heat output:  
Approximate heat output in British thermal  
units (Btu) per hour:  
v
v
v
Minimum configuration: 693 Btu per  
hour (203 watts)  
v
Maximum configuration: 2788 Btu per  
hour (817 watts)  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Features and specifications (continued)  
Up to eight expansion slots (depending Video controller (integrated into IMM):  
Electrical input:  
on the model):  
v
Sine-wave input (50 or 60 Hz) required  
Input voltage and frequency ranges  
automatically selected  
v
Matrox G200eV video graphics  
controller integrated on the system  
board  
v
v
Six expansion slots on the system  
board  
v
v
v
Input voltage low range:  
Four PCI Express Gen2 x8 slots  
(two x8 links and two x4 link)  
Compatible with SVGA and VGA  
Minimum: 100 V ac  
Maximum: 127 V ac  
8 MB DDR2 SDRAM video memory  
controller  
One PCI Express Gen2 x16 slot (x8  
link)  
Input voltage high range:  
Minimum: 200 V ac  
Maximum: 240 V ac  
Note: The maximum video resolution is  
1600 x 1200 at 85 MHz  
One PCI 32-bit/33 MHz slot  
Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA)  
approximately:  
v
v
One PCI Express Gen1 x8 (x4) slot on  
the one-slot extender card  
Diagnostic LEDs:  
Minimum: 0.21 kVA (all models)  
Maximum: 0.82 kVA  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Fan  
Microprocessor  
Memory  
Power supply  
Voltage regulator module (VRM)  
PCI  
Two PCI-X 32-bit/64-bit 133/100/66/  
MHz slots on the two-slot extender card  
Notes:  
1. Power consumption and heat output  
vary depending on the number and  
type of optional features installed and  
the power-management optional  
features in use.  
Battery  
IMM heartbeat  
Enclosure manager heartbeat  
2. These levels were measured in  
controlled acoustical environments  
according to the procedures specified  
by the American National Standards  
Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO 7779  
and are reported in accordance with  
ISO 9296. Actual sound-pressure  
levels in a given location might exceed  
the average values stated because of  
room reflections and other nearby  
noise sources. The declared  
sound-power levels indicate an upper  
limit, below which a large number of  
computers will operate.  
Software  
Lenovo provides software to help get your server up and running.  
EasyStartup  
The EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring your RAID  
controllers and installing supported Windows and Linux operating systems and  
device drivers on your server. The EasyStartup program is provided with your  
server on DVD. The DVD is self starting (bootable). The User Guide for the  
EasyStartup program is on the DVD and can be accessed directly from the  
program's interface. For additional information, see “Using the EasyStartup DVD” on  
EasyManage  
The ThinkServer EasyManage Core server provides centralized hardware and  
software inventory management and secure automated systems management  
through a centralized console. The ThinkServer EasyManage Agent enables other  
clients on the network to be managed by the centralized console. The ThinkServer  
EasyManage Core Server is supported on 32-bit Windows Server 2003 and 32-bit  
Windows Server 2008 products. The ThinkServer EasyManage Agent is supported  
on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE operating systems.  
12 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reliability, availability, and serviceability  
Three important server design features are reliability, availability, and serviceability  
(RAS). The RAS features help to ensure the integrity of the data that is stored in  
the server, the availability of the server when you need it, and the ease with which  
you can diagnose and repair problems.  
The server might have the following RAS features (the features vary depending on  
your model):  
v Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI)  
v Advanced Desktop Management Interface (DMI) features  
v Automatic error retry or recovery  
v Automatic memory downsizing on error detection  
v Automatic restart on nonmaskable interrupt (NMI)  
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) logic supporting a system restart when the  
operating system becomes unresponsive  
v Automatic server restart after a power failure, based on the UEFI setting  
v Availability of microcode level  
v Boot-block recovery  
v Built-in, menu-driven setup, system configuration, and redundant array of  
independent disks (RAID) configuration  
v Built-in monitoring for fan, power, temperature, and voltage  
v Cooling fans with speed-sensing capability  
v Customer support center that is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week  
Note: Service availability will vary by country. Response time varies; may  
exclude holidays.  
v Diagnostic support of ServeRAIDadapters  
v Error codes and messages  
v Error correcting code (ECC) double-data-rate 3 (DDR3) synchronous dynamic  
random-access memory (SDRAM) with serial presence detect (SPD)  
v Error logging of POST failures  
v Hot-swap Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) and hot-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk  
drives  
v Integrated Ethernet controller  
v Key-lock support for physical security  
v Memory change messages posted to the error log  
v Integrated management module (IMM)  
v Power management  
v Power-on self-test (POST)  
v Read-only memory (ROM) checksums  
v ROM-based diagnostics programs  
v Simple-swap Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) hard disk drives  
v Standby voltage for systems-management features and monitoring  
v System auto-configuring from the configuration menu  
v System-error LED on the front bezel and diagnostic LEDs on the system board  
v Upgradeable integrated management module (IMM) firmware  
Chapter 3. What is included with your server 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Upgradeable microcode for POST, server firmware, and read-only memory  
(ROM) resident code, locally or over a LAN  
v Vital product data (VPD); includes serial-number information and replacement  
part numbers, stored in nonvolatile memory, for easier remote maintenance  
14 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power  
This section describes the controls, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and connectors on  
the front and rear of the server, and how to turn the server on and off. For the  
location of the LEDs on the system board, see “System-board LEDs” on page 33.  
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your model.  
Front view  
The following illustrations show the controls, LEDs, and connectors on the front of  
the server models.  
The following is an illustration of the 3.5-inch SAS/SATA hot-swap hard disk drive  
model:  
ꢀ1ꢁ Power-on LED  
ꢀ2ꢁ Power-control button  
ꢀ3ꢁ Hard disk drive activity LED ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
DVD-eject button  
Hard disk drive activity LED (green)  
Hard disk drive status LED (amber)  
ꢀ4ꢁ System-error LED  
ꢀ5ꢁ USB 2  
ꢀ10ꢁ DVD drive activity LED (green)  
ꢀ11ꢁ Front information panel  
ꢀ6ꢁ USB 1  
The following is an illustration of the 2.5-inch SAS/SATA hot-swap hard disk drive  
model:  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ Power-on LED  
ꢀ2ꢁ Power-control button  
ꢀ3ꢁ Hard disk drive activity LED ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
DVD-eject button  
Hard disk drive activity LED (green)  
Hard disk drive status LED (amber)  
ꢀ4ꢁ System-error LED  
ꢀ5ꢁ USB 2  
ꢀ10ꢁ DVD drive activity LED (green)  
ꢀ11ꢁ Front information panel  
ꢀ6ꢁ USB 1  
The following is an illustration of the 3.5-inch SATA simple-swap hard disk drive  
model:  
16 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Power-on LED  
ꢀ2ꢁ Power-control button  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
USB 1  
DVD-eject button  
ꢀ3ꢁ Hard disk drive activity LED ꢀ8ꢁ  
Simple-swap hard disk drive  
DVD drive activity LED (green)  
ꢀ4ꢁ System-error LED  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ USB 2  
ꢀ10ꢁ Information panel  
Power control button and power-on LED  
Press this button to turn the server on and off manually or to wake the  
server from a reduced-power state. The states of the power-on LED are as  
follows:  
Off: ac power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has  
failed.  
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is  
not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. This will  
last approximately 1 to 3 minutes.  
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is  
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on  
the server.  
Lit: The server is turned on.  
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the  
server, press the power-control button or use the IMM Web interface.  
logging on to the IMM Web interface.  
Hard disk drive activity LED  
When this LED is flashing rapidly, it indicates that a hard disk drive is in  
use.  
System-error LED  
When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
An LED on the system board might also be lit to help isolate the error.  
Detailed troubleshooting information is in the Hardware Maintenance  
Manual.  
USB connectors  
Connect USB devices to these connectors.  
DVD-eject button  
Press this button to release a CD or DVD from the DVD drive.  
DVD drive activity LED  
When this LED is lit, it indicates that the DVD drive is in use.  
Hot-swap hard disk drive activity LED (some models)  
On some server models, each hot-swap drive has a hard disk drive activity  
LED. When this green LED is flashing, it indicates that the associated hard  
disk drive is in use.  
When the drive is removed, this LED also is visible on the SAS/SATA  
backplane, next to the drive connector. The backplane is the printed circuit  
board behind drive bays 4 through 7 on 3.5-inch hard disk drive models and  
bays 4 through 11 on 2.5-inch hard disk drive models.  
Hot-swap hard disk drive status LED (some models)  
On some server models, each hot-swap hard disk drive has an amber  
status LED. If this amber status LED is lit, it indicates that the associated  
hard disk drive has failed.  
If an optional ServeRAID adapter is installed in the server and the LED  
flashes slowly (one flash per second), the drive is being rebuilt. If the LED  
flashes rapidly (three flashes per second), the adapter is identifying the  
drive.  
When the drive is removed, this LED also is visible on the SAS/SATA  
backplane, below the hot-swap hard disk drive activity LED.  
18 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operator information panel  
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the operator information panel on the  
front of the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
System power-on LED  
Hard disk drive activity LED  
System-locator LED  
System-information LED  
System-error LED  
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Lit EasyLED; diagnostic LEDs with the  
system-error or information LED also lit  
Description  
System power-on (green)  
The states of the power-on LED are as follows:  
v
Off: ac power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself  
has failed.  
v
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off  
and is not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is  
disabled. Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to  
ac power, the power-control button becomes active.  
v
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is  
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to  
turn on the server.  
v
v
Lit: The server is turned on.  
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To  
wake the server, press the power-control button or use the IMM  
Web interface.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Lit EasyLED; diagnostic LEDs with the  
system-error or information LED also lit  
Description  
Hard-disk drive activity (green)  
When this LED is flashing rapidly, it indicates that there is activity on a  
hard disk drive.  
System locator (blue)  
Use this LED to visually locate the server among other servers.  
System information (amber)  
When this amber LED is on, it indicates that information about a  
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the IMM event log or  
in the system-event log. Check the EasyLED diagnostic panel for more  
information.  
System error (amber)  
When this LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred. Use  
the diagnostic LED panel and the system service label to further isolate  
the error.  
EasyLED diagnostic panel  
The following illustration shows the front LEDs on the EasyLED diagnostic panel.  
The EasyLED diagnostic panel is located inside the front bezel.  
Note: The EasyLED diagnostics LEDs remain lit only while the server is connected  
to power.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
Server processor bus  
Microprocessor  
VRM  
Microprocessor/memory configuration ꢀ11ꢁ System board  
Memory  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
Power supply  
Fan  
ꢀ10ꢁ PCI bus  
ꢀ12ꢁ Temperature  
ꢀ13ꢁ System-event log  
ꢀ14ꢁ USB ports  
NMI  
Hard disk drive/RAID  
20 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Lit EasyLED  
diagnostics LED with  
the system-error or  
information LED also  
lit  
Description  
Action  
System-event log  
(LOG)  
A system error occurred.  
View the contents of the system-event log (see “Event  
Temperature  
The system temperature has  
exceeded a threshold level.  
1. See the system-event log for the source of the  
2. Make sure that the airflow in the server is not  
blocked.  
3. Make sure that the room temperature is neither too  
hot nor too cold (see “Environment” in “Features  
System board (BRD)  
An error occurred on the system  
board.  
1. Check the LEDs on the system board to identify  
the component that is causing the error. The BRD  
LED can be lit for the following conditions:  
v Failed or missing battery  
v Failed voltage regulator  
2. Check the system-event log for information about  
the error.  
3. Replace any failed or missing replaceable  
components, such as the battery.  
4. (Trained service technician only) If a voltage  
regulator has failed, replace the system board.  
PCI bus  
A PCI adapter has failed.  
1. See the system-event log (see “Event logs” on  
2. Check the LEDs on the PCI slots to identify the  
component that is causing the error, and reseat the  
failing adapter.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Failing adapter  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Fan  
A fan has failed or is operating too  
slowly.  
1. Reinstall the removed fan.  
2. If an individual fan LED is lit, replace the fan.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Lit EasyLED  
diagnostics LED with  
the system-error or  
information LED also  
lit  
Description  
Action  
Power supply  
A power supply has failed or has  
been removed.  
Note: In a redundant power  
configuration, the dc power LED on  
one power supply might be off.  
1. Check the individual power-supply LEDs.  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. Power supply  
b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply  
cage cables  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Power supply  
b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply  
cage  
DASD/RAID  
A hard disk drive, SAS controller, or  
RAID adapter error has occurred.  
1. Reinstall the removed drive.  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. Failing hard disk drive  
Notes:  
1. This LED is also lit when a hard  
disk drive is removed from the  
server.  
b. SAS hard disk drive backplane  
c. SAS signal and power cables  
d. System board  
2. The error LED on the failing  
hard disk drive is also lit.  
e. ServeRAID adapter  
3. Replace the components one at a time, in the  
order shown, restarting the server each time.  
3. Check the system-event log for  
a RAID error.  
NMI  
A hardware error has been reported  
to the operating system.  
1. See the system-event log (see “Event logs” on  
2. If the PCI LED is lit, follow the instructions for that  
LED.  
3. If the MEM LED is lit, follow the instructions for  
that LED.  
4. Restart the server.  
22 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Lit EasyLED  
diagnostics LED with  
the system-error or  
information LED also  
lit  
Description  
Action  
Memory (MEM)  
A memory error has occurred.  
Note: The error LED on the DIMM  
is also lit.  
1. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit,  
which indicates that the memory configuration is  
invalid. Reinstall the DIMMs in a supported  
configuration.  
2. If the CNFG LED is not lit, one of the following  
conditions might be present:  
v The server did not start and a failing DIMM LED  
is lit:  
a. Check for a PFA log event in the  
system-event log.  
b. Reseat the DIMM.  
c. Move the DIMM to a different slot or replace  
the DIMM.  
d. (Trained service technician only) Replace  
the system board.  
v The server started, the failing DIMM is disabled,  
and the LED is lit:  
a. If the LEDs are lit by two DIMMs, check the  
system-event log for a PFA event on one of  
the DIMMs, and then replace that DIMM.  
Otherwise, replace both DIMMs.  
b. If the LED is lit by only one DIMM, replace  
that DIMM.  
c. Re-enable the DIMM, using the Setup Utility.  
Microprocessor/  
Memory Configuration occurred. (This LED is used with the  
(CNFG) MEM, VRM, and CPU LEDs.)  
A hardware configuration error has  
1. (The system-error LED, CPU LED, and this LED  
are lit when POST detects a microprocessor  
mismatch.) Remove and install two  
microprocessors of the same cache size, type, and  
clock speed.  
2. (The system-error LED, MEM LED, and this LED  
are lit when POST detects an invalid memory  
configuration.) Remove and install supported  
3. (The system-error LED, VRM LED, and this LED  
are lit when POST detects a missing VRM.) Install  
a VRM for microprocessor 2 (see “Installing a  
4. Check the system-error log for information  
indicating incompatible components.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Lit EasyLED  
diagnostics LED with  
the system-error or  
information LED also  
lit  
Description  
Action  
VRM  
A VRM has failed.  
1. Check the system-event log to determine the  
reason for the lit LED (for a VRM).  
2. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit. If the  
CNFG LED is lit, the memory configuration is  
invalid. Reseat the VRM.  
3. If the CNFG LED is not lit, reseat the following  
components:  
a. Failing VRM  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor associated with the VRM  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Failing VRM  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor associated with the VRM  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Microprocessor (CPU) A microprocessor has failed, or an  
invalid microprocessor configuration  
is installed.  
1. Check the system-event log to determine the  
reason for the lit LED.  
2. Determine whether the CNFG LED is also lit. If the  
CNFG LED is not lit, a microprocessor has failed.  
Note: (Trained service technician  
only) Make sure that the  
a. Make sure that the failing microprocessor,  
which is indicated by the CPU1 or CPU2 error  
LED on the system board, is installed correctly.  
microprocessors are installed in the  
correct sequence.  
b. Replace the following components one at a  
time, in the order shown, restarting the server  
each time:  
1) (Trained service technician only) Failing  
microprocessor  
2) (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
c. If the CNFG LED is lit and the CPU mismatch  
LED on the system board is also lit, an invalid  
microprocessor configuration is installed:  
1) Make sure that the microprocessors are  
compatible with each other. They must  
match in speed and cache size. Use the  
Setup Utility to compare the microprocessor  
information.  
2) (Trained service technician only) Replace  
the incompatible microprocessor.  
24 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Lit EasyLED  
diagnostics LED with  
the system-error or  
information LED also  
lit  
Description  
Action  
Service processor bus The IMM detects an internal error.  
(SP BUS)  
1. Disconnect the server from ac power; then,  
reconnect the server to power and restart the  
server.  
2. Update the IMM firmware.  
1. The following table lists the EasyLED diagnostics LEDs, the problems that they  
indicate, and actions to solve the problems.  
Look at the system service label on the top of the server, which gives an  
overview of internal components that correspond to the LEDs on the EasyLED  
diagnostic panel. This information can often provide enough information to  
diagnose the error.  
2. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain  
components inside the server have LEDs that are lit to indicate the location of a  
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear view  
The following illustration shows the LEDs and connectors on the rear of the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Power cord connector  
ꢀ2ꢁ Ethernet transmit/receive  
activity LED  
ꢀ10ꢁ USB 1  
ꢀ11ꢁ Ethernet 1 10/100/1000  
ꢀ3ꢁ Ethernet link status LED  
ꢀ4ꢁ Ethernet transmit/receive  
activity LED  
ꢀ12ꢁ NMI button  
ꢀ13ꢁ Systems-management Ethernet connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ Ethernet link status LED  
ꢀ6ꢁ Ethernet 2 10/100/1000  
ꢀ7ꢁ USB 4  
ꢀ8ꢁ USB 3  
ꢀ9ꢁ USB 2  
ꢀ14ꢁ Video  
ꢀ15ꢁ Serial 1 (COM 1)  
ꢀ16ꢁ Fault (error) LED  
ꢀ17ꢁ ac power LED  
ꢀ18ꢁ dc power LED  
Power-cord connector  
Connect the power cord to this connector.  
ac power LED  
This green LED provides status information about the power supply. During  
typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are lit. For any other  
combination of LEDs, see the Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
dc power LED  
This green LED provides status information about the power supply. During  
typical operation, both the ac and dc power LEDs are lit. For any other  
combination of LEDs, see the Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
26 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power-error (Fault) LED  
When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that the power supply has failed.  
For any other combination of LEDs, see the Hardware Maintenance  
Manual.  
Video connector  
Connect a monitor to this connector.  
Note: The maximum video resolution is 1600 x 1200 at 60 MHz.  
Serial connector  
Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector.  
Systems-management Ethernet connector  
Use this connector to manage the server, using a dedicated management  
network. If you use this connector, the IMM cannot be accessed directly  
from a production network. A dedicated management network provides  
additional security by physically separating the management network traffic  
from the production network. You can use the Setup Utility to configure the  
server to use a dedicated systems-management network or a shared  
network.  
USB connectors  
Connect USB devices to these connectors.  
Ethernet connectors  
Use these connectors to connect the server to a network.  
Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED  
This LED is on the Ethernet connector on the rear of the server. When this  
LED is lit, it indicates that there is activity between the server and the  
network.  
Ethernet link status LED  
This LED is on the Ethernet connector on the rear of the server. When this  
LED is lit, it indicates that there is an active connection on the Ethernet  
port.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board internal connectors  
The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Main power  
ꢀ12ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ2ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ13ꢁ Simple-swap SATA signal cable connector  
ꢀ14ꢁ Hot-swap main fan connector  
ꢀ15ꢁ SATA 0 (optical drive connector)  
ꢀ16ꢁ SATA 1  
ꢀ3ꢁ Optical power  
ꢀ4ꢁ Front panel connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ6ꢁ USB internal tape drive  
signal connector  
ꢀ17ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ7ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ18ꢁ Battery  
ꢀ8ꢁ Front USB connector  
ꢀ9ꢁ Reserved  
ꢀ19ꢁ PCI extender card connector  
ꢀ20ꢁ Microprocessor 1  
ꢀ10ꢁ Hard disk drive backplane  
configuration signal cable  
connector  
ꢀ21ꢁ Virtual media key connector  
ꢀ11ꢁ Hard disk drive backplane  
configuration signal cable  
connector  
ꢀ22ꢁ Power connector 2  
28 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board external connectors  
The following illustration shows the external input/output (I/O) connectors on the  
system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Power connector  
ꢀ2ꢁ Serial (COM 1)  
ꢀ3ꢁ Video  
ꢀ4ꢁ Systems-management  
Ethernet connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ NMI button  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
USB 1-2  
Ethernet 1  
USB 3-4  
Ethernet 2  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board option connectors  
The following illustration shows the system-board connectors for user-installable  
options.  
ꢀ1ꢁ DIMM 9 (reserved)  
ꢀ2ꢁ DIMM 10  
ꢀ15ꢁ DIMM 2  
ꢀ16ꢁ DIMM 1 (reserved)  
ꢀ3ꢁ DIMM 11  
ꢀ17ꢁ Battery  
ꢀ4ꢁ DIMM 12 (reserved)  
ꢀ5ꢁ DIMM 13  
ꢀ18ꢁ PCI extender card connector  
ꢀ19ꢁ Microprocessor 1  
ꢀ6ꢁ DIMM 14  
ꢀ20ꢁ Microprocessor 2  
ꢀ7ꢁ DIMM 15  
ꢀ8ꢁ DIMM 16  
ꢀ9ꢁ DIMM 8  
ꢀ10ꢁ DIMM 7  
ꢀ11ꢁ DIMM 6  
ꢀ12ꢁ DIMM 5  
ꢀ13ꢁ DIMM 4 (reserved)  
ꢀ14ꢁ DIMM 3  
ꢀ21ꢁ Slot 6, PCI 32 bit/33 MHz  
ꢀ22ꢁ Slot 5, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x8)  
ꢀ23ꢁ Slot 4, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x4)  
ꢀ24ꢁ Slot 3, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x4)  
ꢀ25ꢁ Slot 2, PCI Express Gen2 x18 (x8)  
ꢀ26ꢁ Slot 1, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x8)  
ꢀ27ꢁ Virtual media key connector  
ꢀ28ꢁ Optional VRM connector  
Note: Do not insert memory DIMMs into connectors marked as reserved. These  
DIMM slots are not supported in this model.  
30 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System-board switches and jumpers  
The following illustration shows the switches and jumpers on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
UEFI boot recovery jumper (JP8)  
Clear CMOS jumper (JP1)  
SW8 switch block  
The following table describes the jumpers on the system board.  
Table 2. System-board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper  
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal  
(default) - This keeps the  
CMOS data.  
v Pins 2 and 3: This clears  
the CMOS data, which  
clears the power-on  
password and  
administrator password.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. System-board jumpers (continued)  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP6  
UEFI boot recovery jumper  
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal  
(default) - Loads the  
primary server firmware  
ROM.  
v Pins 2 and 3: This enables  
the server to recovery if  
the server firmware  
becomes damaged.  
Notes:  
v If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
v Do not change the jumper pin position after the server is turned on. Changing the  
position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before the  
server is turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. This can cause an  
unpredictable problem.  
The following table describes the function of each pin on the SW6 switch block.  
Table 3. System-board switches  
Switch pin number  
Default value  
Description  
1
2
Off  
Off  
Reserved.  
Power-on password override.  
Changing the position of this  
switch bypasses the  
power-on password check  
the next time the server is  
turned on and starts the  
Setup Utility so that you can  
change or delete the  
power-on password. You do  
not have to move the switch  
back to the default position  
after the power-on password  
is overridden.  
Changing the position of this  
switch does not affect the  
administrator password check  
if an administrator password  
is set.  
141 for additional information  
about passwords.  
3
4
Off  
Off  
Reserved.  
v When this switch is on Off,  
this is normal mode. This  
loads the primary IMM  
firmware ROM page.  
v When this switch is  
toggled to On, this loads  
the secondary (backup)  
IMM firmware ROM page.  
32 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Important:  
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server,  
then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. Read the safety  
2. Any system-board switch blocks or jumpers that are not shown in the  
illustrations in this document are reserved.  
System-board LEDs  
The following illustration shows the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the system  
board.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ Microprocessor mismatch  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
PCI slot 6 error LED  
LED  
ꢀ2ꢁ Microprocessor 2 error LED ꢀ10ꢁ PCI slot 5 error LED  
ꢀ3ꢁ DIMMs 9-18 error LEDs  
ꢀ11ꢁ PCI slot 4 error LED  
ꢀ4ꢁ DIMMs 1-8 error LEDs  
ꢀ12ꢁ Enclosure manager heartbeat LED  
ꢀ5ꢁ Microprocessor 1 error LED ꢀ13ꢁ PCI slot 3 error LED  
ꢀ6ꢁ System-board error LED  
ꢀ7ꢁ Battery error LED  
ꢀ8ꢁ IMM heartbeat LED  
ꢀ14ꢁ PCI slot 2 error LED  
ꢀ15ꢁ PCI slot 1 error LED  
ꢀ16ꢁ VRM error LED  
For more information about the system-board LEDs, see the Hardware Maintenance  
Manual.  
Optional one-slot PCI extender card  
The following is an illustration of the one-slot PCI extender card that you can install  
to add an additional PCI slot to the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
PCI Express Gen1 x8 (x4) slot  
One-slot extender card  
PCI slot error LED  
Optional two-slot PCI extender card  
The following is an illustration of the two-slot PCI extender cards that you can install  
to add two additional PCI slots to the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
PCI-X 32-bit/84-bit 133/100/66 MHz slots  
Two-slot extender card  
PCI slots error LEDs  
34 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Server power features  
When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the  
operating system does not run, and all core logic except for the service processor  
(the Integrated Management Module) is shut down; however, the server can  
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on  
the server. The power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac  
power but is not turned on.  
Turning on the server  
Approximately 5 seconds after the server is connected to ac power, one or more  
fans might start running to provide cooling while the server is connected to power  
and the power-on button LED will blink quickly. Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after  
the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button becomes active (the  
power-on LED will blink slowly). You can turn on the server by pressing the  
power-control button.  
The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:  
v If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart  
automatically when power is restored.  
Note: When 4 GB or more of memory (physical or logical) is installed, some  
memory is reserved for various system resources and is unavailable to the  
operating system. The amount of memory that is reserved for system resources  
depends on the operating system, the configuration of the server, and the  
configured peripheral component interconnect (PCI) options.  
Turning off the server  
When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can  
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on  
the server. While the server remains connected to ac power, one or more fans  
might continue to run. To remove all power from the server, you must disconnect it  
from the power source.  
Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the server.  
See your operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the  
operating system.  
Statement 5:  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power  
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device  
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current  
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power  
source.  
Chapter 4. Server controls, LEDs, and power 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
1
The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:  
v You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system  
supports this feature. After an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the  
server will be turned off automatically.  
v You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the  
operating system and turn off the server, if your operating system supports this  
feature.  
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the  
power-control button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the server.  
v The integrated management module (IMM) can turn off the server as an  
automatic response to a critical system failure.  
36 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer  
replaceable units  
Important: Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is  
working correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts,  
if an operating system is installed. If the server is not working correctly, see the  
Hardware Maintenance Manual and “Troubleshooting tables” on page 163 for  
diagnostic information.  
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing optional hardware devices in  
the server.  
Installation guidelines  
Before you install options, read the following information:  
38). This information will help you work safely.  
v When you install your new server, take the opportunity to download and apply  
the most recent firmware updates. This step will help to ensure that any known  
issues are addressed and that your server is ready to function at maximum levels  
of performance. To download firmware updates for your server, do the following:  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select  
Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
v Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is working  
correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts, if an  
operating system is installed. If the server is not working correctly, see the  
Hardware Maintenance Manual for diagnostic information.  
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed  
covers and other parts in a safe place.  
v If you must start the server while the cover is removed, make sure that no one is  
near the server and that no tools or other objects have been left inside the  
server.  
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have to  
lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:  
– Make sure that you can stand safely without slipping.  
– Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.  
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy  
object.  
To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing up  
with your leg muscles.  
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical  
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.  
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.  
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver, a small Phillips screwdriver, and a T8 torx  
screwdriver available.  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap fans and  
hot-swap drives.  
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component  
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.  
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates  
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and  
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the  
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on  
hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing and installing a specific  
hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have to  
perform before you remove or install the component.  
v When you have to access the inside of the server, you might find it easier to  
position the server on its side.  
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,  
labels, and ground wires.  
v For a list of supported options for the server, see http://www.lenovo.com/  
System reliability guidelines  
To help ensure proper system cooling and system reliability, make sure that the  
following requirements are met:  
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or a filler panel and electromagnetic  
compatibility (EMC) shield installed in it.  
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to  
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2.0 in.) of open space around the  
front and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper  
cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before turning on the server.  
Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with  
the server cover removed might damage server components.  
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.  
v You have replaced a failed fan as soon as possible.  
v You have replaced a hot-swap fan within 30 seconds of removal.  
v You have replaced a hot-swap drive within 2 minutes of removal.  
v You do not operate the server without the air baffle installed. Operating the  
server without the air baffle might cause the microprocessor to overheat.  
Working inside the server with the power on  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when  
the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which could result in the  
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge  
wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside the server with the  
power on.  
The server (some models) supports hot-swap devices and is designed to operate  
safely while it is turned on and the cover is removed. Follow these guidelines when  
you work inside a server that is turned on.  
v Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts  
before working inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working  
inside the server.  
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.  
38 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist  
watches.  
v Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that could fall  
into the server as you lean over it.  
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws,  
into the server.  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices.  
To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages  
until you are ready to install them.  
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following  
precautions:  
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around  
you.  
v The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an  
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap, if one is available. Always use an  
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside  
the server with the power on.  
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.  
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.  
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.  
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted  
metal surface on the outside of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains  
static electricity from the package and from your body.  
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without  
setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into  
its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server cover or on a  
metal surface.  
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating reduces  
indoor humidity and increases static electricity.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Major components of the server  
The following illustration shows the major components in the server (depending on  
the server model). The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your  
hardware.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Bezel  
ꢀ15ꢁ ServeRAID MR10is  
ꢀ2ꢁ Optical drive bay EMC  
shield  
ꢀ16ꢁ Cover  
ꢀ3ꢁ 2.5-inch EMC shield  
ꢀ4ꢁ 3.5-inch EMC shield  
ꢀ5ꢁ 2.5-inch hot-swap  
ꢀ6ꢁ 3.5-inch hot-swap  
ꢀ17ꢁ Rear adapter retention bracket  
ꢀ18ꢁ Air baffle  
ꢀ19ꢁ Heat sink  
ꢀ20ꢁ Microprocessor  
ꢀ7ꢁ 3.5-inch simple-swap drive ꢀ21ꢁ Heat sink retention bracket  
ꢀ8ꢁ SAS/SATA 2.5-inch  
backplane  
ꢀ22ꢁ DIMMs  
ꢀ9ꢁ SAS/SATA 3.5-inch  
backplane  
ꢀ10ꢁ Simple-swap 3.5-inch  
backplane  
ꢀ23ꢁ System board  
ꢀ24ꢁ VRM  
ꢀ11ꢁ Fan assembly  
ꢀ12ꢁ Hot-swap fan  
ꢀ13ꢁ ServeRAID MR10i  
ꢀ14ꢁ ServeRAID BR10i  
ꢀ25ꢁ Power supply  
ꢀ26ꢁ Control panel assembly  
ꢀ27ꢁ USB cable assembly  
ꢀ28ꢁ DVD drive  
Opening the bezel  
To open the bezel, do the following:  
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Unlock the side cover.  
40 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: You must unlock the side cover to open or remove the bezel. When you  
lock the server side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.  
3. Remove the bezel. Position your finger on the depressed area on the left side of  
the bezel and rotate the bezel away from the server.  
4. If you want to remove the bezel completely, press the retention tabs on the  
hinge assembly toward each other and pull the hinge assembly out of the  
chassis.  
Note: While pressing the retention tabs together, you might need a screwdriver  
to help pry the hinge out.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Bezel  
Hinge assembly  
Retention tabs  
Note: The bezel will also disengage from the chassis hinges if you rotate the  
bezel beyond 180° or if excessive pressure is applied to the bezel. Do not be  
alarmed because this is how the bezel was designed. The bezel is designed  
with breakaway hinges so that you can easily reattach it to the chassis.  
Opening and closing the bezel media door  
To open the media door, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Unlock the side cover.  
Note: You must unlock the side cover to open or remove the bezel. When you  
lock the server side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.  
3. Grasp the pull-point area on the left side of the bezel door and rotate the bezel  
to the open position.  
42 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. From inside of the top section of the bezel door, slide the blue tab up to unlock  
the bezel media door (slide the tab down when you want to lock it); then, grasp  
the pull-point area on the left side of the media door and pull the door open.  
Note: To close and lock the bezel media door, rotate the door to the closed  
position and slide the blue tab down to lock it.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Bezel media door  
Media door lock  
Removing the side cover  
Important: Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is  
working correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts,  
if an operating system is installed. If the server is not working correctly, see the  
Hardware Maintenance Manual for diagnostic information.  
To remove the server side cover, do the following:  
Attention: Operating the server for more than 30 minutes with the side cover  
removed might damage server components. For proper cooling and airflow, replace  
the side cover before turning on the server.  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices (see “Turning off the server” on  
page 35); then, disconnect all power cords and external cables.  
3. Unlock the side cover.  
4. Press the cover-release latch down (as shown in the illustration); then, remove  
the cover and set it aside.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Cover release latch  
Latch  
Left-side cover  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before turning on the  
server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes)  
with the cover removed might damage server components.  
Removing the air baffle  
To remove the air baffle, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables.  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and the cover is  
facing up.  
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Position the server on its side.  
5. Unlock the side cover.  
7. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the way  
up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
44 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
8. Remove the air baffle assembly. Press the blue tab (on top of the fan cage) on  
the air baffle assembly to the left and lift it from the server and set it aside.  
Note: It might be easier to remove the air baffle if you lift up the plastic tab that  
is over the DIMMs in the rear of the server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Air baffle pinch tab  
Air baffle  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the fan cage assembly  
Attention:  
v Replace a hot-swap fan within 30 seconds of removal.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 2  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To remove the front fan cage assembly, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
4. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
5. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the way  
up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
6. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
7. Press in on the fan cage assembly release buttons on both sides of the chassis  
to release the fan cage assembly from the connector on the chassis. Lift the fan  
cage assembly up and out of the chassis and set it aside.  
46 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Fan cage assembly  
Fan cage assembly release buttons  
8. If you are instructed to return the fan cage, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing the fan cage assembly  
Attention:  
v Replace a hot-swap fan within 30 seconds of removal.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 2  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To install the fan cage assembly, do the following:  
Note: If you have to order a replacement fan cage assembly, it comes pre-routed  
with two cables. Only one of the cables is necessary for this server.  
1. Make sure that the server is flat on its side and align the fan cage with the  
guide rails on the sides of the chassis.  
Note: Make sure that all cables are routed so that they are not damaged when  
inserting the fan cage assembly into the server.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Fan cage assembly  
Fan cage assembly release buttons  
2. Slide the fan cage into the chassis and press firmly until the fan cage is seated  
firmly in place.  
Note: Make sure that both release buttons click into place.  
3. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
4. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly into the  
chassis.  
48 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
6. Lock the side cover.  
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the front USB connector assembly  
To remove the front USB connector assembly, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
5. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
6. Remove the fan cage assembly (see “Removing the fan cage assembly” on  
7. Open the bezel. Place your finger on the pull-point area on the left side of the  
bezel door and rotate it away from the server.  
8. Disconnect the front USB cable from the system board, noting the routing of  
the cable (see “System-board internal connectors” on page 28 for the location  
of the front USB connector).  
50 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Press the release tab on the front USB housing; then, tilt the top of the  
housing away from the chassis and lift the housing out of the chassis.  
10. Squeeze the spring clips ꢀ1ꢁ on the sides of the front USB connector  
assembly and pull the assembly out of the back of the housing.  
11. Pull the front USB cable out of the chassis.  
12. If you are instructed to return the front USB connector assembly, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to  
you for shipping.  
Installing the front USB connector assembly  
To install the front USB connector assembly, do the following:  
1. Feed the front USB cable through the opening in the front of the chassis.  
2. Squeeze the spring clips ꢀ1ꢁ on the front USB connector assembly and insert  
the assembly into the housing.  
3. Place the bottom edge of the housing into the chassis; then, tilt the top of the  
housing into position until it clicks into place.  
4. Route and connect the front USB cable to the system board (see  
USB connector).  
5. Close the bezel.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Install the fan cage assembly (see “Installing the fan cage assembly” on page  
Note: Make sure that all cables are routed so that they are not damaged  
when inserting the fan cage assembly into the server.  
7. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
8. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power-supply release tab  
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
10. Lock the side cover.  
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the rear adapter-retention bracket  
To remove the rear adapter-retention bracket, do the following:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
3. Remove all adapters and place the adapters on static-protective surface (see  
Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before  
removing the adapters.  
52 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Open the rear adapter retention bracket.  
5. Press the rear adapter retention bracket and release the top hinge point; then,  
release the other hinge point and remove the bracket from the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Rear adapter retention bracket  
Hinge pins  
6. If you are instructed to return the rear adapter-retention bracket, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to  
you for shipping.  
Installing the rear adapter retention bracket  
To install the rear adapter retention bracket, do the following:  
1. Insert the bottom hinge point on the rear adapter retention bracket into the  
matching hole in the chassis; then, insert the top hinge point into the matching  
hole.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Rear adapter retention bracket  
Hinge pins  
2. Install the adapters (see “Installing an adapter” on page 96).  
3. Close the rear adapter retention bracket.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
5. Lock the side cover, if necessary.  
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the front adapter-retention bracket  
To remove the front adapter-retention bracket, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
4. Open the front and rear adapter-retention brackets.  
5. Remove all adapters and place the adapters on static-protective surface (see  
Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before  
removing the adapters.  
6. Lift the top of the front adapter-retainer bracket and release the hinge point;  
then, remove the bottom hinge point and remove the bracket from the chassis.  
7. If you are instructed to return the front adapter-retention bracket, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to  
you for shipping .  
Installing the front adapter-retention bracket  
To install the front adapter retention bracket, do the following:  
1. Insert one hole on the front adapter-retention bracket into the hinge point.  
2. Position the other hole and insert the adapter-retention bracket into the hinge  
point.  
3. Install the adapters (see “Installing an adapter” on page 96).  
4. Close the front and rear adapter retention brackets.  
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
6. Lock the side cover.  
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the battery  
The following notes describe information that you must consider when removing  
and replacing the battery in the server:  
v The lithium battery must be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you  
replace the battery, you must adhere to the following instructions.  
v You must replace the battery with a lithium battery of the same type from the  
same manufacturer.  
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.  
54 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only a battery recommended by the  
manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery,  
replace it only with the same module type made by the same manufacturer.  
The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or  
disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
To remove the battery, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the  
battery.  
3. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
4. Carefully position the server flat on its side so that it is facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
5. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
6. Remove any adapters that impede access to the battery.  
7. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System-board internal connectors”  
on page 28 for the location of the battery on the system board).  
8. Remove the battery:  
a. Use a finger to push the battery horizontally out of its socket, pushing it  
away from the socket ꢀ1ꢁ.  
b. Lift and remove the battery from the socket ꢀ2ꢁ.  
9. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Installing the battery  
The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing the  
battery in the server.  
v After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the  
system date and time.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The lithium battery must be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you  
replace the battery, you must adhere to the following instructions.  
v You must replace the battery with a lithium battery of the same type from the  
same manufacturer.  
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.  
Statement 2:  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only a battery recommended by the  
manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery,  
replace it only with the same module type made by the same manufacturer.  
The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or  
disposed of.  
Do not:  
v Throw or immerse into water  
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
v Repair or disassemble  
To install the battery, do the following:  
1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the  
replacement battery.  
2. Insert the new battery:  
a. Position the battery so that it is tilted slightly and the smaller side is facing  
the socket.  
b. Place the battery into the socket toward the right side of the socket, press it  
down and slide it to the left of the socket housing until it snaps firmly in  
place.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Positive (+) side  
3. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
4. Lock the side cover.  
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
56 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: You must wait approximately 1 to 3 minutes after you connect the power  
cord of the server to an electrical outlet before pressing the power-control  
button.  
6. Start the Setup Utility and reset the configuration.  
v Set the system date and time.  
v Set the power-on password.  
v Reconfigure the server.  
Removing and installing drives  
Depending on the server model, the server might come with a SATA attached  
DVD-ROM drive in bay 1.  
The following are illustrations of the server and the location of the drive bays. Your  
hardware might differ, depending on the model.  
The following illustration shows the location of the drive bays in the 2.5-inch  
hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA hard disk drive server models.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Bay 1  
ꢀ2ꢁ Bay 2  
ꢀ3ꢁ Bay 3  
ꢀ4ꢁ Bay 0  
ꢀ5ꢁ Bay 1  
ꢀ6ꢁ Bay 2  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
ꢀ8ꢁ  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
ꢀ10ꢁ Bay 6  
ꢀ11ꢁ Bay 7  
Bay 3  
Bay 4  
Bay 5  
The following illustration shows the location of the drive bays in the 3.5-inch  
hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA hard disk drive server models.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
Bay 1  
Bay 2  
Bay 3  
Bay 4  
Bay 5  
Bay 6  
Bay 7  
The following illustration shows the location of the drive bays in the 3.5-inch  
simple-swap SATA hard disk drive server models.  
58 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
Bay 1  
Bay 2  
Bay 3  
Bay 4  
Bay 5  
Bay 6  
Bay 7  
The following notes describe the types of drives that the server supports and other  
information that you must consider when installing a drive:  
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in  
the documentation that comes with the drive.  
v Check the instructions that come with the drive to see whether you have to set  
any switches or jumpers on the drive. If you are installing a SAS or SATA device,  
be sure to set the SAS or SATA ID for that device.  
v Optional external tape drives and DVD-ROM drives are examples of  
removable-media drives. You can install removable-media drives only in bays 1,  
2, and 3.  
v To install a 3.5-in. drive in a 5.25-in. bay, you must use a 5.25-in. conversion kit.  
v The electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and cooling of the server are  
protected by having all bays and PCI slots covered or occupied. When you install  
a drive or PCI adapter, save the EMC shield and filler panel from the bay or the  
PCI adapter slot cover in the event that you later remove the drive or adapter.  
v For a complete list of supported options for the server, see http://  
Removing a DVD drive  
To remove a DVD drive, do the following:  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Open the bezel. Place your finger on the pull-point area on the left side of the  
bezel door and rotate it away from the server.  
5. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
6. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
7. Remove the fan cage assembly (see “Removing the fan cage assembly” on  
60 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Fan cage assembly  
Fan cage assembly release buttons  
8. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the drive that is to be removed.  
9. Press and hold the blue release tabs on each side of the DVD drive to release  
the drive; then, pull the drive out of the front of the server.  
10. Remove the blue optical drive rails ꢀ1ꢁ from the side of the drive ꢀ2ꢁ and save  
the optical rails to use when you install the replacement drive.  
11. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping .  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a DVD drive  
To install a DVD drive, do the following:  
1. If you are replacing a drive, make sure that:  
v You have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in the  
documentation that comes with the new drive.  
v You have checked the instructions that come with the new drive to  
determine whether you must set any switches or jumpers in the drive.  
v You have removed the blue optical drive rails from the side of the old drive  
and have them available for installation on the new drive.  
Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following  
safety precaution.  
Statement 3:  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices,  
or transmitters) are installed, note the following:  
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product  
could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no  
serviceable parts inside the device.  
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser  
diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view  
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the  
beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
2. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
62 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
3. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
4. Remove the fan cage assembly. Press in on the fan cage assembly release  
buttons on the sides of the chassis to release the fan cage assembly from the  
connector on the chassis. Lift the fan cage assembly up and out of the chassis  
and set it aside.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Fan cage assembly  
Fan cage assembly release buttons  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new DVD drive to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the DVD drive from the  
package and place it on a static-protective surface.  
6. Follow the instructions that come with the drive to set jumpers or switches, if  
there are any.  
Note: You might find it easier to install the new drive from the front and then  
attach the cables.  
7. Align the holes on the blue optical drive rails with the pins on the side of the  
drive and snap the optical drive rails onto the drive. Align the rails on the DVD  
drive with the guides on the drive bay and slide the drive into the drive bay  
until it locks into place.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
EMC shield  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Optical drive  
Optical drive rails  
8. Reconnect the power and signal cables to the drive.  
9. Make sure that the signal cable is routed through the plastic slot on the bottom  
of the chassis underneath the fan cage assembly so that it does not block the  
airflow to the rear of the drives as shown in the following illustration:  
64 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Optical drive power cable  
SATA optical drive signal cable  
10. Install the fan cage assembly (see “Installing the fan cage assembly” on page  
11. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
12. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
13. Close the bezel.  
14. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
15. Lock the side cover.  
16. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise go to  
Removing an optional tape drive  
To remove an optional full-high tape drive, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords  
and all external cables.  
3. Unlock and the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
4. Open the bezel. Place your finger on the pull-point area on the left side of the  
bezel door and rotate it away from the server.  
5. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
6. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
7. Remove the fan cage assembly. Press in on the fan cage assembly release  
buttons on the sides of the chassis to release the fan cage assembly from the  
connector on the chassis. Lift the fan cage assembly up and out of the chassis  
66 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
and set it aside.  
8. Disconnect the tape drive cable from the system board.  
9. Remove the screws that secure the tape drive ꢀ1ꢁ to the server.  
10. Gently pull the drive out of the server.  
11. If you are instructed to return the tape drive, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing an optional tape drive  
To install a optional full-high tape drive, do the following:  
1. Remove the EMC shields from the drive bay, if installed.  
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the tape drive to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the tape drive from the  
package and place it on a static-protective surface.  
3. Install the blue rails on the sides of the tape drive.  
4. Align the rails on tape drive with the guides in the drive bay; then, slide the  
tape drive into the server from the front of the server until it clicks into place.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
EMC shield  
Tape drive  
5. If the tape drive comes with screws, secure the tape drive to the chassis with  
the supplied screws.  
6. Connect one of the connectors on the optical drive power cable to the tape  
drive.  
Note: If you are installing an RDX internal USB tape drive, use the  
SATA-to-traditional power converter cable to serve as a bridge between the  
optical power cable and the power connector on the RDX tape drive.  
7. Connect one end of the tape drive signal cable to the tape drive and the other  
end to the connector on the system board. Route the cable through the plastic  
slots on the bottom of the chassis underneath the fan cage assembly as  
shown in the following illustration:  
68 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
SATA optical drive power cable  
USB signal cable connector  
USB signal cable  
SATA optical drive power cable (SATA-to-traditional power converter cable also  
included but not pictured)  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
SATA optical drive signal cable  
8. Reinstall the fan cage assembly. Align the fan cage assembly over the fan  
cage assembly slot and with the connector on the system board. Lower the fan  
cage assembly into the chassis and press down firmly until the fan cage  
assembly is seated firmly in place.  
Note: Make sure that all wires and cables inside the server are routed  
correctly before installing the fan cage assembly. Wiring that is not properly  
routed could be damaged or might prevent the fan cage assembly from seating  
properly in the server.  
9. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
10. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
11. Close the bezel.  
12. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
13. Lock the side cover.  
14. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise go to  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more  
than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.  
To remove a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components  
when server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which might result in  
the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an  
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work  
inside the server with the power on.  
2. Unlock the side cover.  
3. Open the bezel. Place your finger on the pull-point area on the left side of the  
bezel door and rotate it away from the server.  
4. Press the release latch at the top of the drive to release the drive handle.  
5. Rotate the handle on the drive upward to the open position.  
6. Pull the hot-swap drive out of the bay approximately 25 mm (1 inch). Wait  
approximately 45 seconds while the drive spins down before you remove the  
drive completely from the bay.  
70 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Release latch  
Drive tray handle (in open position)  
Drive tray  
Hard disk drive  
7. If you are instructed to return the 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to  
you for shipping.  
Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
Before installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, read the following information:  
v The 2.5-inch hot-swap drives must be either all SAS hard disk drives or all SATA  
hard disk drives; do not mix SAS and SATA drives.  
v Inspect the drive tray for signs of damage.  
v To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more than 10  
minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.  
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap  
drive bays.  
Locate the documentation that comes with the hard disk drive and follow those  
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section.  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when  
server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might result in the loss  
of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge wrist  
strap or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the power  
on.  
To install a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more  
than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each bay.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and  
place it on a static-protective surface.  
3. Remove the filler panel from the drive bay, if one is installed.  
4. Orient the drive as shown in the illustration.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
EMC shield  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Drive tray  
Drive tray handle (in open position)  
Release latch  
Hard disk drive  
5. Make sure that the tray handle is open.  
6. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.  
7. Push the drive into the bay until the drive stops.  
8. Push the tray handle to the closed (locked) position.  
9. Check the hard disk drive status indicator to make sure that the hard disk drive  
is operating correctly.  
After you replace a failed hard disk drive, the green activity LED flashes as the  
disk spins up. The amber LED turns off after approximately 1 minute. If the  
new drive starts to rebuild, the amber LED flashes slowly, and the green  
activity LED remains lit during the rebuild process. If the amber LED remains lit  
continuously, the drive is faulty and must be replaced. See the Hardware  
Maintenance Manual.  
Note: You might have to reconfigure the disk arrays after you install hard disk  
drives.  
10. Close the bezel.  
11. Lock the side cover.  
72 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more  
than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.  
To remove a 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA hard disk drive, do the  
following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Unlock the side cover.  
3. Open the bezel. Place your finger on the pull-point area on the left side of the  
bezel door and rotate it away from the server.  
4. Rotate the drive tray handle of the drive assembly to the open position.  
5. Grasp the handle of the drive and pull the drive out of the bay.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Hot-swap hard disk drive  
Drive tray  
Drive tray handle (in open position)  
6. If you are instructed to return the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to  
you for shipping.  
Installing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
Before installing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, read the following information:  
v The 3.5-inch hot-swap drives must be either all SAS hard disk drives or all SATA  
hard disk drives; do not mix SAS and SATA drives.  
v Inspect the drive tray for signs of damage.  
v To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more than 10  
minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.  
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap  
drive bays.  
To install a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
1. Remove the EMC shield, if one is present.  
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place  
it on a static-protective surface.  
3. Make sure that the drive tray handle is in the open position.  
4. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay; then, carefully slide the  
drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive snaps into place.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Hot-swap hard disk drive  
Drive tray  
Drive tray handle (in open position)  
EMC shield  
5. Rotate the drive tray handle to the closed position.  
74 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Check the hard disk drive status indicator to make sure that the hard disk drive  
is operating correctly.  
After you replace a failed hard disk drive, the green activity LED flashes as the  
disk spins up. The amber LED turns off after approximately 1 minute. If the new  
drive starts to rebuild, the amber LED flashes slowly, and the green activity LED  
remains lit during the rebuild process. If the amber LED remains lit, see the  
Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
Note: You might have to reconfigure the disk arrays after you install hard disk  
drives.  
7. Close the bezel.  
8. Lock the side cover.  
Removing a simple-swap hard disk drive  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all  
power from the server before removing or installing a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To remove a simple-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock the side cover.  
4. Open the bezel. Place your finger on the pull-point area on the left side of the  
bezel door and rotate it away from the server.  
5. Grasp the tab on the drive bay EMC shield and rotate it to the open position.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Filler panels  
Drive-bay EMC shield  
Tab  
Hard disk drive  
6. Pull the loops of the drive assembly that is to be removed toward each other;  
then, pull the drive assembly out of the bay and set it aside.  
7. If you are instructed to return the simple-swap hard disk drive, follow all  
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to  
you for shipping.  
Installing a simple-swap hard disk drive  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all  
power from the server before removing or installing a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To install a simple-swap hard disk drive, do the following:  
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place  
it on a static-protective surface.  
2. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.  
76 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Filler panels  
Drive-bay EMC shield  
Tab  
Hard disk drive  
3. Pull the loops of the drive assembly toward each other; then, carefully slide the  
drive assembly into the drive bay until it stops and release the loops.  
Note: Do not release the loops on the drive assembly until it is completely  
seated.  
4. Close the drive bay EMC shield.  
5. Close the bezel.  
6. Lock the side cover.  
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives  
Hot-swap server models have drive bays that are connected to a SAS/SATA  
backplane. This backplane, also known as the hot-swap-drive backplane, is the  
printed circuit board behind these bays.  
The hot-swap-drive backplane controls the IDs for the internal hot-swap drive bays.  
The following tables list the IDs for the hard disk drives and backplane that are  
connected to hot-swap models.  
Table 4. IDs for the four-bay 3.5-inch hot-swap drive models  
Drive bay number  
ID  
Drive bay 4  
0
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 4. IDs for the four-bay 3.5-inch hot-swap drive models (continued)  
Drive bay number  
Drive bay 5  
ID  
1
Drive bay 6  
2
Drive bay 7  
3
Table 5. IDs for the eight-bay 2.5-inch hot-swap models  
Drive bay number  
Drive bay 4  
Drive bay 5  
Drive bay 6  
Drive bay 7  
Drive bay 8  
Drive bay 9  
Drive bay 10  
Drive bay 11  
ID  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Power and signal cables for internal drives  
The server uses cables to connect SATA attached, simple-swap SATA, hot-swap  
SATA and hot-swap SAS devices to the power supply and to the system board.  
system-board connectors.) Review the following information before connecting  
power and signal cables to internal drives:  
v The drives that are preinstalled in the server come with power and signal cables  
attached. If you replace any drives, remember which cable is attached to which  
drive.  
v When you route a cable, make sure that it does not block the airflow to the rear  
of the drives or over the microprocessor or DIMMs.  
The following cables are provided:  
v The DVD drive is attached to an ATA signal cable. The blue connector is  
attached to the system board. The connector on the other end is attached to the  
SATA device. The middle connector attaches to an optional optical device or tape  
drive. A separate power cable provides power to the device from the system  
board.  
v Simple-swap SATA models: The simple-swap SATA models come with a  
combination signal/power cable that connects to the connector on the system  
board and the simple-swap SATA backplate to provide signal and power to the  
simple-swap SATA drives. Connect the power connector on the split end of the  
cable to the Hard disk drive backplane power connector on the system board  
and connect the signal connector on the split end of the cable to the  
Simple-swap SATA signal cable connector on the system board. On the other  
end of the combination signal/power cable, connect a signal connector to each  
drive bay signal connector on the simple-swap SATA backplate and connect a  
power connector to each drive bay power connector on the simple-swap SATA  
backplate.  
v Hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA models:  
78 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– The 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS and hot-swap SATA models come with the  
following cables to provide signal and power to the hot-swap SAS/SATA  
drives:  
- Two single signal cables (thick red and black) that connects to the signal  
cable connectors on the hard disk drive backplanes and the connectors on  
the SAS/SATA RAID adapter (see the ServeRAID adapters installation  
instructions in this document for more cabling information).  
- A split power cable (red/yellow/black). The end of the power cable with the  
single connector connects to the Hard disk drive backplane power  
connector on the system board and the end of the power cable with the  
two connectors, connects to the power connectors on the hard disk drive  
backplanes.  
- A split configuration signal cable (black). The end of the configuration signal  
cable with the single connector connects to the Hard disk drive backplane  
configuration signal connector on the system board and the end of the  
configuration signal cable with the two connectors, connects to the  
configuration signal connectors on the hard disk drive backplanes.  
– The 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS and hot-swap SATA models come with the  
following to provide signal and power to the 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA  
drives:  
- A single signal cable (thick red and black) that connects to the hard disk  
drive backplane and one of the connectors on the SAS/SATA RAID adapter  
(see the ServeRAID adapters installation instructions in this document for  
more cabling information).  
- A single power cable (red/yellow/black) that connects to the Hard disk  
drive backplane power connector on the system board and to the power  
connector on the hard disk drive backplane.  
- A single configuration signal cable (black) that connects to the Hard disk  
drive backplane configuration signal connector on the system board  
and the configuration signal connector on the hard disk drive backplane.  
For more information about the requirements for SAS/SATA cables and connecting  
SAS/SATA devices, see the documentation that comes with these devices.  
For a list of supported options for the server, see http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver.  
Removing a power supply  
When you remove or install a power supply, observe the following precautions.  
Statement 8:  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following  
label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any  
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside  
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact  
a service technician.  
Statement 11:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates sharp edges, corners, or joints nearby.  
Statement 17:  
CAUTION:  
The following label indicates moving parts nearby.  
To remove a power supply, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
Note: It might be helpful to position the server on its side for the remainder of  
this procedure.  
4. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the way  
up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
80 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
5. Disconnect the cables from the power supply to the system board and all  
internal components. Be sure to make a note of the cable routing.  
Attention: Support the power supply while you remove the mounting screws.  
After the screws are removed, the power supply is loose and can damage other  
components in the server.  
6. While you support the power-supply, remove the three screws from the pivot  
bracket that secure the power supply to the chassis; then, lift the power supply  
off the chassis. Save the screws to use when you install the replacement power  
supply.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply retaining screws  
Power supply assembly  
7. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing a power supply  
To install a power supply, do the following:  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the  
power-control button becomes active.  
1. Align the screw holes in the power-supply-cage pivot bracket with the  
corresponding screw holes on the rear of the chassis.  
82 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply retaining screws  
Power supply assembly  
2. While you support the power supply cage, install the three screws that secure  
the power supply to the chassis.  
3. Connect the cables from the power supply to the system board and all internal  
components.  
4. Rotate the power-supply-cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply-cage release tab and rotate the power-supply-cage assembly into  
the chassis.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
5. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
6. Lock the side cover.  
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing a hot-swap fan  
Attention:  
v Replace a hot-swap fan within 30 seconds of removal.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 2  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To replace a hot-swap fan, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components  
when the server is powered on might cause the server to halt, which could  
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an  
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when working  
inside the server with the power on.  
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
3. With your finger, slide the orange release tab in the direction indicated by the  
arrow on top of the fan to unlock the fan handle. Grasp the fan handle and pull  
the fan ꢀ1ꢁ out of the fan cage assembly.  
84 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap fan, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing a hot-swap fan  
Attention:  
v Replace a hot-swap fan within 30 seconds of removal.  
v To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 2  
minutes with the side cover removed.  
To install a hot-swap fan, do the following:  
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hot-swap fan to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the fan from the package  
and place it on a static-protective surface.  
2. Align the fan ꢀ1ꢁ over the fan slot and lower fan into the slot in the fan cage  
assembly.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Press down on the fan until it locks into place; then, close the fan handle to the  
locking position.  
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
5. Lock the side cover.  
Removing a memory module  
To remove a DIMM, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
5. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the way  
up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
86 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
6. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
7. Locate the DIMM connector that contains the DIMM that is to be replaced.  
Note: Do not insert memory DIMMs into connectors marked as reserved.  
These DIMM slots are not supported in this model.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ DIMM 1 (reserved)  
ꢀ2ꢁ DIMM 2  
ꢀ3ꢁ DIMM 3  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
DIMM 9 (reserved)  
ꢀ10ꢁ DIMM 10  
ꢀ11ꢁ DIMM 11  
ꢀ4ꢁ DIMM 4 (reserved)  
ꢀ5ꢁ DIMM 5  
ꢀ6ꢁ DIMM 6  
ꢀ7ꢁ DIMM 7  
ꢀ8ꢁ DIMM 8  
ꢀ12ꢁ DIMM 12 (reserved)  
ꢀ13ꢁ DIMM 13  
ꢀ14ꢁ DIMM 14  
ꢀ15ꢁ DIMM 15  
ꢀ16ꢁ DIMM 16  
.
Attention: To avoid breaking the DIMM retaining clips or damaging the DIMM  
connectors, open and close the clips gently.  
8. Carefully open the retaining clips on each end of the DIMM connector and  
remove the DIMM.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
DIMM  
Retaining clip  
9. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing a memory module  
Note: If you are replacing a faulty DIMM, make sure that the replacement DIMM is  
the correct type of memory. If you are adding DIMMs, install the DIMMs in the  
sequence indicated in this section.  
The following notes describe the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that  
the server supports and other information that you must consider when installing  
DIMMs (see “System-board option connectors” on page 30 for the location of the  
DIMM connectors):  
v The server supports industry-standard, 800, 1066, or 1333 MHz,  
PC3-10600R-999 (single-rank or dual-rank) double-data-rate 3 (DDR3),  
registered, synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline  
memory modules (DIMMs) with error correcting code (ECC). For a list of  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
supported options for the server, see http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver; then,  
select your country and navigate to the list of options for the server.  
– The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the  
following format.  
ggg eRxff-PC3-wwwwwm-aa-bb-cc  
where:  
ggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)  
e is the number of ranks  
1 = single-rank  
2 = dual-rank  
4 = quad-rank  
ff is the device organization (bit width)  
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)  
8 = x8 organization  
16 = x16 organization  
wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps  
6400 = 6.40 GBps (PC3-800 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
8500 = 8.53 GBps (PC3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
10600 = 10.66 GBps (PC3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
12800 = 12.80 GBps PC3-1600 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
m is the DIMM type  
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)  
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)  
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)  
aa is the CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating frequency  
bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level  
cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM  
d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM  
v The server supports a maximum of 12 single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs.  
Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The  
information on the label is in the format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The  
numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates whether the DIMM is single-rank  
(n=1) or dual-rank (n=2).  
v The server supports three single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs per channel. The  
following table shows an example of the maximum amount of memory that you  
can install, using ranked DIMMs.  
Table 6. Maximum memory installation using ranked DIMMs  
Number of DIMMs  
DIMM type  
DIMM size  
4 GB  
Total memory  
48 GB  
12  
12  
12  
Single-rank DIMMs  
Dual-rank DIMMs  
Dual-rank DIMMs  
4 GB  
48 GB  
8 GB (if available)  
96 GB  
v The DIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8  
GB (when available). The server supports a minimum of 2 GB and a maximum of  
96 GB of system memory.  
90 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The amount of usable memory is reduced depending on the system  
configuration. A certain amount of memory must be reserved for system  
resources. To view the total amount of installed memory and the amount of  
configured memory, run the Setup Utility. For additional information, see “Using  
v A minimum of one DIMM must be installed for each microprocessor. For  
example, you must install a minimum of two DIMMs if the server has two  
microprocessors installed. However, to improve system performance, install a  
minimum of three DIMMs for each microprocessor.  
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM  
install in the server.  
v The server comes with a minimum of two 1 GB DIMMs, installed in slots 3 and 6.  
v When you install additional DIMMs in independent mode, install them in the order  
shown in the following table to optimize system performance. All three channels  
on the memory interface for each microprocessor can be populated in any order  
and have no matching requirements.  
Table 7. Independent mode DIMM installation sequence  
Installed microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence  
Microprocessor socket 1  
Microprocessor socket 2  
3, 6, 8, 2, 5, 7  
11, 14, 16, 10, 13, 15  
Note: DIMM connectors 1, 4, 9, and 12 are not functional. Do not install DIMMs in these  
connectors.  
v The server supports memory mirroring (mirroring mode):  
– Memory-mirroring mode replicates and stores data on two pairs of DIMMs  
within two channels (channels 0 and 1) simultaneously. If a failure occurs, the  
memory controller switches from the primary pair of memory DIMMs to the  
backup pair of DIMMs. To enable memory mirroring through the Setup Utility,  
select System Settings Memory. For more information, see “Using the  
Setup Utility” on page 138. When you use the memory mirroring feature,  
consider the following information:  
- When you use memory mirroring, you must install a pair of DIMMs at a  
time. One DIMM must be in channel 0, and the mirroring DIMM must be in  
the same slot in channel 1. The two DIMMs in each pair must be identical  
in size, type, and rank (single or dual), and organization, but not in speed.  
The channels run at the speed of the slowest DIMM in any of the channels.  
- Channel 2, DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in  
memory-mirroring mode.  
- The maximum available memory is reduced to half of the installed memory  
when memory mirroring is enabled. For example, if you install 48 GB of  
memory, only 24 GB of addressable memory is available when you use  
memory mirroring.  
The following table lists the usable DIMM connectors on each memory channel.  
Table 8. Connectors on each memory channel  
Memory channel  
Channel 0  
DIMM connectors  
2, 3, 10, 11  
Channel 1  
5, 6, 13, 14  
Channel 2  
7, 8, 15, 16  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following table lists the installation sequence for installing DIMMs in  
memory-mirroring mode.  
Table 9. Memory-mirroring mode DIMM population sequence  
Number of installed  
DIMMs  
microprocessors  
DIMM connector  
First pair of DIMMs  
Second pair of DIMMs  
Third pair of DIMMs  
Fourth pair of DIMMs  
1
1
2
2
3, 6  
2, 5  
11, 14  
10, 13  
Note: DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring mode and DIMM  
connectors 1, 4, 9, and 12 are not functional on this server. Do not install DIMMs in these  
connectors.  
v When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information  
changes. When you restart the server, the system displays a message that  
indicates that the memory configuration has changed.  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when  
the server is powered on might cause the server to stop, which could result in the  
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge  
wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside the server with the  
power on.  
To install a DIMM, do the following:  
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
2. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
3. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
92 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
5. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board. Determine the connector in  
which you will install the DIMM. Install the DIMMs in the sequence indicated  
earlier in this section.  
Note: DIMM connectors 1, 4, 9, and 12 are not functional in this server. Do  
not install DIMMs in these connectors.  
ꢀ1ꢁ DIMM 1 (reserved)  
ꢀ2ꢁ DIMM 2  
ꢀ3ꢁ DIMM 3  
ꢀ9ꢁ  
DIMM 9 (reserved)  
ꢀ10ꢁ DIMM 10  
ꢀ11ꢁ DIMM 11  
ꢀ4ꢁ DIMM 4 (reserved)  
ꢀ5ꢁ DIMM 5  
ꢀ6ꢁ DIMM 6  
ꢀ7ꢁ DIMM 7  
ꢀ8ꢁ DIMM 8  
ꢀ12ꢁ DIMM 12 (reserved)  
ꢀ13ꢁ DIMM 13  
ꢀ14ꢁ DIMM 14  
ꢀ15ꢁ DIMM 15  
ꢀ16ꢁ DIMM 16  
Note: Do not insert memory DIMMs into connectors marked as reserved.  
These DIMM slots are not supported in this model.  
6. Open the retaining clips on the DIMM connector.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM  
connectors, open and close the clips gently.  
7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted  
metal surface on the server; then, remove the new DIMM from the package.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
DIMM  
Retaining clip  
9. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the  
slots at the ends of the DIMM connector. Firmly press the DIMM straight down  
into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the DIMM  
simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the  
DIMM is firmly seated in the connector. If there is a gap between the DIMM  
and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not been correctly installed. Open the  
retaining clips, remove the DIMM, and then reinsert it.  
10. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
11. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
94 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
12. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
13. Lock the side cover.  
14. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing an adapter  
To remove an adapter, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
4. Disconnect any cables from the adapter or any cables that impede access to  
the adapter.  
5. Rotate the rear adapter retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position. If you  
are removing a full-length adapter, open the front adapter-retention bracket also.  
6. If necessary, remove the expansion-slot screw at the rear of the adapter.  
7. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and pull the  
adapter from the server.  
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed in all empty slots. This  
maintains the electronic emissions standards of the computer and ensures  
proper ventilation of computer components.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Rear adapter-retention bracket  
Adapter  
Front adapter-retention bracket  
8. If the adapter is not being replaced, install an expansion-slot cover in the  
expansion-slot opening.  
9. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing an adapter  
The following notes describe the types of adapters that the server supports and  
other information that you must consider when installing an adapter. Adapter that  
the server supports might vary, depending on your server model.  
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those  
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section. If you must change the  
switch setting or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the instructions that come  
with the adapter.  
v Read the documentation that comes with your operating system.  
v Use PCI slot 2 for video adapters.  
v
Do not set the maximum digital video adapter resolution above 1600 x 1200 at  
60 Hz for an LCD monitor. This is the highest resolution that is supported for any  
add-on video adapter that you install in the server.  
v Any high-definition video-out connector or stereo connector on any add-on video  
adapter is not supported  
v The server provides up to eight adapter connectors, or slots as follows  
(depending on your server model):  
Note: The x8 (x4) designation for slot 3 (for example) identifies an x8 slot that is  
designed to support x8 adapters and x4 adapters that can downshift to operate  
at the x4 bandwidth. If you install an x8 adapter in slot 3 that can downshift to  
the x4 bandwidth, it will run at the x4 bandwidth. The x8 connector can be used  
96 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
for x4 and x8 adapters. These same rules apply to the other PCI slots also.  
Check the information that comes with your adapter for compatibility information.  
– Slots on the system board:  
- Slot 1, PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x8)  
- Slot 2, PCI Express Gen 2 x16 (x8)  
- Slot 3, PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x4)  
- Slot 4, PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x4)  
- Slot 5, PCI Express Gen 2 x8 (x8)  
- Slot 6, PCI 32-bit/33 MHz  
– If you install the one-slot PCI extender card in the server:  
-
One additional PCI Express Gen 1 x8 (x4) slot is available  
– If you install the two-slot PCI extender card in the server:  
v You can install full-length adapters that are supported in slots 2, 3, 4, and 5 on  
the system board, and the slots on the one-slot or two-slot extender cards. You  
can only install half-length adapters in slots 1 and 6.  
v The 32-bit slot 6 supports 5.0 V keyed PCI adapters; they do not support 3.3 V  
keyed adapters. Universal adapters are supported in slots 4 and 5 if they are  
universally keyed.  
v You can install the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA controller, the optional  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller, or the optional ServeRAID-MR10is  
VAULT SAS/SATA controller in slots 1 of hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA  
models. These ServeRAID adapters are not supported on the simple-swap  
models.  
v The ServeRAID-BR10i adapter comes standard on hot-swap SAS and hot-swap  
SATA models and provides RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E support. You can order the  
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter which provides RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60  
support, and the optional ServeRAID-MR10is adapter with an encryption 1078  
DE chip provides RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 support.  
To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters function  
properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level is  
updated to at least 11.x.x-XXX , and the supporting drivers.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated  
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level  
of code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
v The server scans PCI Express slot 1 and PCI Express slots 2 and 3 to assign  
system resources. Then, the server starts the devices in the following order, if  
you have not changed the default startup sequence: PCI Express slot 1, PCI  
Express slot 2, PCI slot 6, and PCI Express slot 3.  
v For a list of supported options for the server, see  
To install an adapter, do the following:  
Note: The instructions in this section apply to any PCI adapter (for example, video  
graphics adapters or network adapters).  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables  
and power cords; then, remove the side cover. See “Removing the side cover”  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Follow the cabling instructions that come with the adapter to set jumpers or  
switches, if there are any. Route the adapter cables before you install the  
adapter.  
5. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
6. If you are installing a full-length adapter, press on the release lever on the right  
side of the front adapter-retention bracket to release the retaining tab on the  
left side of the bracket.  
7. Carefully grasp the adapter by the top edge or upper corner, and move the  
adapter directly from the static-protective package to the adapter slot. Align the  
adapter with the expansion slot guides; then, press the adapter firmly into the  
expansion slot. For a full-length adapter, make sure that the front edge of the  
adapter is properly seated in the correct slot in the front adapter-retention  
bracket.  
Note: Make sure that the adapter is seated correctly in the expansion slot  
before you turn on the server. Incomplete installation of an adapter might  
damage the system board or the adapter.  
98 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Adapter  
Rear adapter retention bracket  
Front adapter retention bracket  
8. Connect all required cables to the adapter. Route cables so that they do not  
block air flow from the fans.  
9. Rotate the rear and front adapter-retention brackets to the closed position.  
10. Close the bezel.  
Lock the side cover.  
Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to  
Installing a second microprocessor  
The following notes describe the type of microprocessor that the server supports  
and other information that you must consider when installing a microprocessor:  
v The server comes with one microprocessor installed, but supports up to two  
microprocessors.  
Note: A microprocessor must be installed and removed only by a trained service  
technician.  
v To download the most current level of the firmware for your server, do the  
following:  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select  
Servers and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v The first microprocessor must always be installed in microprocessor socket 1.  
v When one microprocessor is installed, a heat sink filler is not required for  
microprocessor socket 2; however, the air baffle must be installed to provide  
proper system cooling.  
v Do not remove the first microprocessor from the system board when you install  
the second microprocessor.  
v When you install the second microprocessor, you must also install additional  
v The first microprocessor voltage regulator module (VRM) is integrated on the  
system board.  
v When you install a second microprocessor, you must also install the voltage  
regulator module (VRM), which comes with the microprocessor option kit, in the  
VRM connector on the system board.  
v Some models support dual-core microprocessors or quad-core microprocessors.  
Do not mix dual-core microprocessors and quad-core microprocessors in the  
same system. Install all dual-core or all quad-core microprocessors in the server.  
v To ensure proper server operation when you install an additional microprocessor,  
use microprocessors that have the same QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) link  
speed, integrated memory controller frequency, core frequency, power segment,  
internal cache size, and type. You can use the Setup Utility to determine the  
specific type of microprocessor that is installed on the system board.  
v Mixing microprocessors of different stepping levels within the same server model  
is supported. You do not have to install the microprocessor with the lowest  
stepping level and features in microprocessor socket 1.  
v The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you  
do not have to set any microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.  
v If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner) is  
removed from the heat sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of  
the heat sink or set down the heat sink.  
v If you have to replace a microprocessor, call for service.  
v To order additional microprocessor options, contact your Lenovo marketing  
representative or authorized reseller.  
The following illustration shows the location of the microprocessor connectors and  
the VRM connector.  
100 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ DIMM 9 (reserved)  
ꢀ2ꢁ DIMM 10  
ꢀ15ꢁ DIMM 2  
ꢀ16ꢁ DIMM 1 (reserved)  
ꢀ3ꢁ DIMM 11  
ꢀ17ꢁ Battery  
ꢀ4ꢁ DIMM 12 (reserved)  
ꢀ5ꢁ DIMM 13  
ꢀ18ꢁ PCI extender card connector  
ꢀ19ꢁ Microprocessor 1  
ꢀ6ꢁ DIMM 14  
ꢀ20ꢁ Microprocessor 2  
ꢀ7ꢁ DIMM 15  
ꢀ8ꢁ DIMM 16  
ꢀ9ꢁ DIMM 8  
ꢀ10ꢁ DIMM 7  
ꢀ11ꢁ DIMM 6  
ꢀ12ꢁ DIMM 5  
ꢀ13ꢁ DIMM 4 (reserved)  
ꢀ14ꢁ DIMM 3  
ꢀ21ꢁ Slot 6, PCI 32 bit/33 MHz  
ꢀ22ꢁ Slot 5, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x8)  
ꢀ23ꢁ Slot 4, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x4)  
ꢀ24ꢁ Slot 3, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x4)  
ꢀ25ꢁ Slot 2, PCI Express Gen2 x18 (x8)  
ꢀ26ꢁ Slot 1, PCI Express Gen2 x8 (x8)  
ꢀ27ꢁ Virtual media key connector  
ꢀ28ꢁ Optional VRM connector  
To install an additional microprocessor, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables (see  
“Turning off the server” on page 35); then, unlock and remove the server cover  
3. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
5. Remove the fan cage assembly (see “Removing the fan cage assembly” on  
6. Install the VRM in the VRM connector:  
a. Turn the VRM so that the VRM keys align correctly with the slot connector.  
b. Firmly press the VRM straight down into the connector by applying  
pressure on both ends of the VRM simultaneously.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Heatsink 2  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
Microprocessor release lever  
VRM connector  
Microprocessor 2 VRM  
Alignment key tab  
Microprocessor 2  
Alignment key  
c. Make sure that the retaining clips are in the locked position when the VRM  
is firmly seated in the connector.  
d. Make sure that the retaining clips are in the locked position when the VRM  
is firmly seated in the connector.  
7. Locate the second microprocessor connector on the system board.  
8. Install the microprocessor:  
a. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any  
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the microprocessor  
from the package.  
b. Remove the protective cover, tape, or label from the surface of the  
microprocessor socket, if any is present.  
Attention: Make sure that the release latch on the microprocessor socket  
is in the fully open position before you insert the microprocessor in the  
socket. Failure to do so might result in permanent damage to the  
microprocessor, microprocessor socket, and system board.  
102 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Rotate the microprocessor release latch on the microprocessor socket from  
the closed and locked position to the fully open position.  
Attention:  
v Do not touch the microprocessor contact; handle the microprocessor by  
the edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as  
oil from your skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts  
and the socket.  
v Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor during  
installation or removal can damage the contacts.  
v Do not use excessive force when pressing the microprocessor into the  
socket.  
v Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented and aligned with land  
number 1 in the socket before you try to close the latch.  
d. Align the microprocessor with the socket (note the alignment mark and the  
position of the notches); then, carefully place the microprocessor on the  
socket and close the microprocessor bracket frame.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Microprocessor  
Alignment triangles  
Notches  
Microprocessor bracket frame  
e. Carefully close the microprocessor release latch to secure the  
microprocessor in the socket.  
9. Install the heat sink.  
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat sink or  
set down the heat sink after you remove the plastic cover. Touching the  
thermal grease will contaminate it.  
The following illustration shows the bottom surface of the heat sink.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Thermal grease  
Heat sink  
a. Make sure that the heat-sink release lever is in the open position.  
b. Remove the plastic protective cover from the bottom of the heat sink.  
c. If the new heat sink did not come with thermal grease, (Trained service  
technician only) apply thermal grease on the microprocessor before you  
install the heat sink (see the Hardware Maintenance Manual for information  
on applying thermal grease).  
d. Align the heat sink above the microprocessor with the thermal-grease side  
down.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
ꢀ7ꢁ  
Heat-sink flange  
Microprocessor  
Release lever locking tab  
Retainer bracket  
Alignment tab  
Heat-sink release lever  
Notch  
104 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
e. Tilt the heat sink slightly to the side and slide the heat sink flange  
underneath the flange of the heat sink retainer bracket.  
f. Press down firmly on the heat sink until it is seated securely.  
g. Rotate the heat-sink lever to the closed position and hook it underneath the  
lock tab.  
10. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
11. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
Removing a ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA controller  
To remove a ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-BR10i adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.  
6. Carefully open the retaining clip on each end of the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter  
connector and remove the adapter from the server.  
7. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA controller  
The ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA controller must be installed in the dedicated  
connector, PCI slot 1, on the system board. The ServeRAID-BR10i adapter is  
supported on hot-swap server models only. The ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA  
adapter enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E capability on hot-swap hard  
disk drives.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
To install the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords  
and all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover”  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-BR10i adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
5. Open the retaining clip on each end of the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter  
connector on the system board.  
6. Touch the static-protective package containing the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter  
to any unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the  
ServeRAID-BR10i adapter from the package.  
7. Turn the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter so that the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter keys  
align correctly with the connector.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or  
the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter.  
106 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ServeRAID-BR10i controller  
PCI slot 1  
8. Press the ServeRAID-BR10i adapter firmly into the connector on the system  
board.  
9. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
10. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Remove the fan cage assembly (see “Removing the fan cage assembly” on  
12. Connect the configuration signal cable. See “Power and signal cables for  
internal drives” on page 78 for information about cabling the power and signal  
cables.  
13. Complete the cabling of the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA adapter.  
v For the eight drive-bay, 2.5-inch server model, connect one end of the signal  
cable to the drive backplane for drive bays 0 through 3 and route the other  
end through the plastic slot on the bottom of the chassis underneath the  
front fan cage; then, connect it to the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA  
controller as shown in the following illustrations:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Signal cable for drives 0-3  
Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
The following illustration shows the connectors on the controller to which  
you connect the signal cables from the drive backplanes.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ServeRAID-BR10i controller  
Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
Adapter connector for drives 4-7 signal cable  
Connect one end of the other signal cable to the drive backplane for drive  
bays 4 through 7 and route the other end of the cable through the plastic  
108 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
slots on the bottom of the chassis underneath the fan cage assembly; then,  
connect it to the ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA controller as shown in the  
following illustration:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Signal cable for drives 4-7  
Adapter connector for drives 4-7 signal cable  
Signal cable for drives 0-3  
Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
Connect the single end of the power cable to the Hard disk drive  
backplane power connector on the system board and connect the split  
end of the power cable to the connectors on the backplane as shown in the  
following illustration.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Power connector  
Power cable  
Backplane power connectors  
v For the four drive-bay, 3.5-inch server model, connect the signal cable as  
shown in the following illustration:  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Adapter connector  
Signal cable  
14. Reinstall the front fan cage assembly. Align the front fan cage assembly over  
the fan cage assembly slot and with the connector on the system board. Lower  
the fan cage assembly into the chassis and press down firmly until the fan  
cage assembly is seated firmly in place. Make sure that no cables will be  
pinched.  
15. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
16. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the closed (locked) position.  
17. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
110 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, Go to  
Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller  
To remove a ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA adapter, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
5. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.  
6. Carefully open the retaining clip on each end of the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter  
connector and remove the adapter from the server.  
7. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller  
The optional ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller can be installed only in its  
dedicated connector, PCI slot 1, on the system board. The ServeRAID-MR10i  
adapter is supported on hot-swap server models only. The ServeRAID-MR10i  
SAS/SATA adapter enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60  
support capability on hot-swap hard disk drives. For configuration information, see  
the documentation on the ServeRAID CD that comes with the adapter.  
Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters  
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level  
is updated to at least 11.xx-XXX, and the supporting drivers.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
To install the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords  
and all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover”  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.  
3. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
4. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
5. Remove the screw that secures the expansion-slot cover to the chassis (if no  
adapter is installed in the slot). Store the expansion-slot cover and screw in a  
safe place for future use.  
Note: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This  
maintains the electronic emissions standards of the server and ensures proper  
ventilation of server components.  
6. Open the retaining clips on each end of the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter  
connector on the system board.  
7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the ServeRAID-MR10i  
adapter to any unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the  
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter and battery pack from the package.  
8. If the battery pack (battery carrier and battery) did not come installed on the  
ServeRAID adapter, install the battery pack.  
a. Align the battery carrier pins and the connector for the battery carrier with  
the pin holes and connector on the ServeRAID adapter; then, lower the  
battery carrier onto the ServeRAID adapter.  
112 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ServeRAID adapter  
Battery carrier  
Battery  
Connector for battery carrier  
b. Press the battery carrier into the connector on the ServeRAID adapter until  
it is firmly connected.  
c. Secure the battery carrier to the ServeRAID adapter with the screws that  
came with the battery pack.  
9. Turn the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter so that the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter  
keys align correctly with the connector.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or  
the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ServeRAID-MR10i controller  
PCI slot 1  
10. Press the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter firmly into the connector on the system  
board.  
11. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
12. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
13. Remove the front fan cage assembly (see “Removing the fan cage assembly”  
14. Connect the configuration signal cable. See “Power and signal cables for  
internal drives” on page 78 for information about cabling the power and signal  
cables.  
15. Complete the cabling of the ServeRAID-MR10i adapter. See “Power and signal  
cables for internal drives” on page 78 for additional information about cabling  
the power and signal cables.  
v For the eight drive-bay, 2.5-inch server model, connect one end of the signal  
cable to the drive backplane for drive bays 0 through 3 and route the other  
end through the plastic slot on the bottom of the chassis underneath the  
front fan cage; then, connect it to the ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA  
controller as shown in the following illustrations:  
114 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
Signal cable for drives 0-3  
The following illustration shows the connectors on the controller to which  
you connect the signal cables from the drive backplanes.  
ꢀ1ꢁ ServeRAID-MR10i controller  
ꢀ2ꢁ Adapter connector for drives 4-7 signal cable  
ꢀ3ꢁ Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
ꢀ4ꢁ Battery  
Connect one end of the signal cable to the drive backplane for drive bays 4  
through 7 and route the other end of the cable through the plastic slots on  
the bottom of the chassis underneath the fan cage assembly; then, connect  
it the ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller as shown in the following  
illustration:  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Signal cables for drives 4-7  
Adapter connector for drives 4-7 signal cable  
Signal cable for drives 0-3  
Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
Connect the single end of the power cable to the Hard disk drive  
backplane power connector on the system board and connect the split  
end of the power cable to the connectors on the backplane as shown in the  
illustration.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Power connector  
Power cable  
Backplane power connectors  
v For the four drive-bay, 3.5-inch server model, connect the signal cable as  
shown in the following illustration:  
116 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Adapter connector  
Signal cable  
16. Reinstall the front fan cage assembly. Align the front fan cage assembly over  
the fan cage assembly slot and with the connector on the system board. Lower  
the fan cage assembly into the chassis and press down firmly until the fan  
cage assembly is seated firmly in place. Make sure that no cables will be  
pinched.  
17. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
18. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
19. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now.  
20. Replace the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134). Go to  
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to  
Removing an optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller  
To remove a ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
5. Disconnect any cables connected to the adapter.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter connector, open and close the clips gently.  
6. Carefully open the retaining clip on each end of the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter  
connector and remove the adapter from the server.  
7. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for shipping.  
Installing the optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller  
The optional ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller can be installed only  
in its dedicated connector, PCI slot 1, on the system board. The ServeRAID-MR10is  
adapter is supported on hot-swap server models only. The ServeRAID-MR10is  
SAS/SATA adapter with an encryption 1078 DE chip set enables integrated RAID  
levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, and 60 support capability on hot-swap hard disk drives. For  
configuration information, see the documentation on the ServeRAID CD that comes  
with the adapter.  
Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID 10i, 10is, or 10M adapters  
function properly on UEFI-based servers, make sure that the adapter firmware level  
is updated to at least 11.xx-XXX, and the supporting drivers.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
To install the ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA controller and route the cables, do the  
following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
118 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords  
and all external cables.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the  
ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter connector, open and close the clips  
gently.  
3. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
4. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
5. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
6. Remove the screw that secures the expansion-slot cover to the chassis (if no  
adapter is installed in the slot). Store the expansion-slot cover and screw in a  
safe place for future use.  
Note: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This  
maintains the electronic emissions standards of the server and ensures proper  
ventilation of server components.  
7. Open the retaining clips on each end of the slot connector in which you want  
to install the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter.  
8. Touch the static-protective package that contains the ServeRAID-MR10is  
adapter to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the  
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter from the package and place it on a  
static-protective surface.  
9. If the battery pack (battery carrier and battery) did not come installed on the  
ServeRAID adapter, install the battery pack.  
a. Align the battery carrier pins and the connector for the battery carrier with  
the pin holes and connector on the ServeRAID adapter; then, lower the  
battery carrier onto the ServeRAID adapter.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ServeRAID adapter  
Battery carrier  
Battery  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Connector for battery carrier  
b. Press the battery carrier into the connector on the ServeRAID adapter until  
it is firmly connected.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Secure the battery carrier to the ServeRAID adapter with the screws that  
came with the battery pack.  
10. Turn the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter so that the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter  
keys align correctly with the connector on the system board.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or  
the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ServeRAID-MR10is connector  
PCI slot 1  
11. Press the ServeRAID-MR10is adapter firmly into the connector on the system  
board.  
12. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
120 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
13. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
14. Remove the front fan cage assembly (see “Removing the fan cage assembly”  
15. Connect one end of the black configuration signal cable to the backplane and  
connect the other end to the hard disk drive backplane configuration signal  
cable connector on the system board.  
16. Complete the cabling of the ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA adapter.  
v For the eight drive-bay, 2.5-inch server model, connect one end of the signal  
cable to the drive backplane for drive bays 0 through 3 and route the other  
end through the plastic slot on the bottom of the chassis underneath the  
front fan cage; then, connect it to connector J8 on the ServeRAID-MR10is  
SAS/SATA controller as shown in the following illustrations:  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
Signal cable for drives 0-3  
The following illustration shows the connectors on the controller to which  
you connect the signal cables from the drive backplanes.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ServeRAID-MR10i controller  
Adapter connector (J9) for drives 4-7 signal cable  
Adapter connector (J8) for drives 0-3 signal cable  
Battery  
Connect one end of the other signal cable to the drive backplane for drive  
bays 4 through 7 and route the other end of the cable through the plastic  
slots on the bottom of the chassis underneath the fan cage assembly; then,  
connect it to connector J9 on the ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA controller  
as shown in the following illustration:  
122 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Signal cable for drives 4-7  
Adapter connector for drives 4-7 signal cable  
Signal cable for drives 0-3  
Adapter connector for drives 0-3 signal cable  
Connect the single end of the power cable to the Hard disk drive  
backplane power connector on the system board and connect the split  
end of the power cable to the connectors on the backplane as shown in the  
following illustration.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Power connector  
Power cable  
Backplane power connectors  
v For the four drive-bay, 3.5-inch server model, connect the signal cable as  
shown in the following illustration:  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Adapter connector  
Signal cable  
17. Reinstall the front fan cage assembly. Align the front fan cage assembly over  
the fan cage assembly slot and with the connector on the system board. Lower  
the fan cage assembly into the chassis and press down firmly until the fan  
cage assembly is seated firmly in place. Make sure that no cables will be  
pinched.  
18. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
19. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the closed (locked) position.  
20. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
124 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
21. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now.  
22. Replace the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134). Go to  
Removing the virtual media key  
To remove the virtual media key, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and  
all external cables. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side  
3. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
4. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
5. Remove any adapters that prevent you from accessing the virtual media key  
connector on the system board (see “Removing an adapter” on page 95).  
6. Press outward on the retention tab and pull the virtual media key out of the  
connector.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not insert  
a
a
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
Do not insert  
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
Do not insert  
a
a
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
Do not insert  
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Alignment bracket  
Virtual media key (rear)  
Virtual media key (front)  
Retention tab  
Virtual media key connector  
7. If you are instructed to return the virtual media key, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for  
shipping.  
Installing the virtual media key  
To install a virtual media key, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords  
and all external cables.  
3. Unlock the side cover.  
4. Remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page 43).  
5. Carefully position the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.  
Note: Do not allow the server to fall over.  
6. Rotate the rear adapter-retention bracket to the open (unlocked) position.  
7. Remove any adapters that prevent you from accessing the virtual media key  
connector on the system board.  
Note: Make a note of the cabling for later when you reinstall the adapters.  
8. Align the alignment bracket on the rear of the key with the retention tab on the  
system board; then, slide the key down into the virtual media key connector on  
the system board until it is firmly seated in place.  
126 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not insert  
a
a
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
Do not insert  
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
Do not insert  
a
a
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
Do not insert  
memory DIMM in this connector.This DIMM slot is not supported in this model.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
Alignment bracket  
Virtual media key (rear)  
Virtual media key (front)  
Retention tab  
Virtual media key connector  
9. Reinstall any adapters that you removed earlier.  
10. Rotate the rear adapter retention bracket to the closed (locked) position.  
11. Reinstall the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
12. Lock the side cover.  
13. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Removing the control-panel assembly  
To remove the control-panel assembly, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords  
and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the side cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Open the bezel. Place your finger on the pull point area on the left side of the  
bezel door and rotate it away from the server.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the  
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the  
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply  
Power-supply handle  
6. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 44).  
7. Remove the fan cage assembly (see “Removing the fan cage assembly” on  
8. Slide the drives in bay 1 and bay 2 forward slightly toward the front of the  
server. It is not necessary to remove these drives.  
128 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Disconnect the control-panel assembly cable from the system board, noting the  
the location of the front panel connector).  
10. Locate the control-panel assembly release latch.  
11. Press down the release latch of the control-panel assembly and pull the  
assembly toward the rear of the server. After you pull the assembly out  
approximately halfway, start turning it downward and pull it out of the chassis.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Release latch  
Control panel assembly  
12. If you are instructed to return the control-panel assembly, follow all packaging  
instructions, and use any packaging materials that are supplied to you for  
shipping.  
Installing the control-panel assembly  
To install the control-panel assembly, do the following:  
1. Position the front end of the control-panel assembly in the channel above drive  
bay 1.  
2. Slide the control-panel assembly toward the front of the chassis until it clicks  
into place.  
3. Route and connect the control-panel assembly cable to the system board (see  
control panel connector).  
4. Slide the drives in bay 1 and bay 2 back into the drive bays, if necessary.  
5. Install the fan cage assembly (see “Installing the fan cage assembly” on page  
6. Install the air baffle (see “Installing the air baffle” on page 132).  
7. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the  
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly  
into the chassis.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
8. Close the bezel.  
9. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
10. Lock the side cover.  
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Completing the installation  
To complete the installation, you must install the bezel, install the side cover, and  
connect all the cables and, for certain options, run the Setup Utility. Follow the  
instructions in this section.  
Closing the bezel  
To close the bezel, do the following:  
1. If you removed the bezel from the chassis, align the hinge assembly with the  
hinge holes on the chassis.  
130 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Bezel  
Hinge assembly  
Retention tabs  
2. Push the hinges into the holes on the chassis until they snap into place.  
3. If however, the bezel was removed by detaching the sliding hinge mount from  
the hinge assembly (using the breakaway method as the bezel was designed to  
do), do the following to reattach the bezel:  
a. Press in on the rear of the sliding hinge mount until it extends beyond the  
edge of the bezel and hold it in place.  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Sliding hinge mount  
Hinge pin  
Hinge assembly  
b. Align the sliding hinge mount with the hinge pin on the hinge assembly on  
the chassis.  
c. Press the sliding hinge mount against the hinge pin until the sliding hinge  
mount snaps onto the hinge pin.  
4. Close the bezel.  
Note: When you lock the server side cover, it locks both the cover and the  
bezel.  
Installing the air baffle  
To replace the air baffle, do the following:  
1. Align the air baffle pins with the holes on the fan cage and the pin hole on the  
rear of the chassis.  
132 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Air baffle pinch tab  
Air baffle  
2. Lower the air baffle into the server until the air baffle is seated firmly.  
3. Press the power supply release tab and rotate the power supply back into the  
server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Power supply support bracket  
Power supply release tab  
4. Install the side cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134).  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Lock the side cover.  
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached  
devices and turn on the server.  
Installing the side cover  
If you removed the side cover, reinstall it.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the side cover before turning on  
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30  
minutes) with the side cover removed might damage server components.  
To install the side cover, do the following:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Cover release latch  
Lock  
Left-side cover  
To reinstall the side cover, do the following:  
1. Make sure that all cables, adapters, and other components are installed and  
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts inside the server.  
Also, make sure that all internal cables are correctly routed.  
2. Insert the bottom edges of the cover onto the inside lip of the chassis and rotate  
the cover toward the server.  
3. Press down on the cover-release latch and close the cover to secure it in place.  
4. Lock the side cover.  
Note: When you lock the server side cover, it locks both the cover and the  
bezel.  
Connecting the cables  
Attention: To prevent damage to equipment, connect the power cords last.  
134 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the server cables and connector panel have color-coded connections, match the  
color of the cable end with the color of the connector. For example, match a blue  
cable end with a blue panel connector, a red cable end with a red connector, and  
so on.  
The following illustration shows the input/output (I/O) connectors on the rear of the  
server.  
ꢀ1ꢁ Power cord connector  
ꢀ2ꢁ Ethernet transmit/receive  
activity LED  
ꢀ10ꢁ USB 1  
ꢀ11ꢁ Ethernet 1 10/100/1000  
ꢀ3ꢁ Ethernet link status LED  
ꢀ4ꢁ Ethernet transmit/receive  
activity LED  
ꢀ12ꢁ NMI button  
ꢀ13ꢁ Systems-management Ethernet connector  
ꢀ5ꢁ Ethernet link status LED  
ꢀ6ꢁ Ethernet 2 10/100/1000  
ꢀ7ꢁ USB 4  
ꢀ8ꢁ USB 3  
ꢀ9ꢁ USB 2  
ꢀ14ꢁ Video  
ꢀ15ꢁ Serial 1 (COM 1)  
ꢀ16ꢁ Fault (error) LED  
ꢀ17ꢁ ac power LED  
ꢀ18ꢁ dc power LED  
Updating the server configuration  
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove an internal  
option or an external device, you might receive a message that the configuration  
has changed. The Setup Utility starts automatically so that you can save the new  
configuration settings. For additional information, see “Using the Setup Utility” on  
Chapter 5. Installing optional devices and replacing customer replaceable units 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some options have device drivers that you must install. For information about  
installing device drivers, see the documentation that comes with each option.  
If the server has a ServeRAID adapter and you have installed or removed a hard  
disk drive, see the ServeRAID documentation for information about reconfiguring  
the disk arrays.  
Connecting external devices  
If you install a supported optional adapter, you can attach external devices to the  
server.  
To attach an external device, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information (see “Safety” on page vii and “Installation  
guidelines” on page 37) as well as the documentation that comes with the  
device.  
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.  
3. Follow the instructions that come with the device to prepare it for installation  
and to connect it to the server.  
136 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6. Configuring the server  
The following configuration programs and utilities come with the server:  
v Setup Utility  
The UEFI (formerly BIOS) Setup Utility program is part of the basic input/output  
system firmware. Use it to change the startup-device sequence, set the date and  
time, and set passwords. For information about using this program, see “Using  
v Boot Manager program  
The Boot Manager program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the  
startup sequence that is set in the Setup Utility and temporarily assign a device  
to be first in the startup sequence. For more information about using this  
v Integrated Management Module  
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the  
firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to  
remotely manage a network. For information about using the IMM, see “Using the  
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the  
Integrated Management Module (IMM). The virtual media key is required to  
enable the remote presence functions. When the optional virtual media key is  
installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. Without the  
virtual media key, you will not be able to access the network remotely to mount  
or unmount drives or images on the client system. However, you will still be able  
to access the Web interface without the virtual media key. You can order the  
optional virtual media key, if one did not come with your server. For more  
information about how to enable the remote presence function, see “Enabling the  
v Ethernet controller configuration  
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the  
v LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure the integrated SAS/SATA  
controller with RAID capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For  
information about using this program, see “Using the LSI Configuration Utility  
The following table lists the different server configurations and the applications  
that are available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.  
Table 10. Server configuration and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays  
RAID array configuration  
(before operating system is (after operating system is  
installed) installed)  
RAID array management  
Server configuration  
ServeRAID-BR10i adapter  
(LSI 1068) installed  
LSI Utility (Setup Utility, press MegaRAID Storage Manager  
Ctrl+C) (for monitoring storage only)  
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter  
(LSI 1078) installed  
MegaRAID Storage Manager MegaRAID Storage Manager  
(MSM), MegaRAID BIOS  
Configuration Utility (press C  
to start)  
(MSM)  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program  
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup Utility for modifying UEFI settings  
and IMM settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to modify UEFI  
settings from the command line without the need to restart the server to access  
the Setup Utility. For more information about using this program, see “Advanced  
Using the Setup Utility  
Use the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI), formerly BIOS, Setup Utility  
program to perform the following tasks:  
v View configuration information  
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports  
v Set the date and time  
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices  
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features  
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features  
v View and clear error logs  
v Resolve configuration conflicts  
Starting the Setup Utility  
To start the Setup Utility, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,  
the power-control button becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an  
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the  
full Setup Utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited  
Setup Utility menu is available.  
3. Select settings to view or change.  
Setup Utility menu choices  
The following choices are on the Setup Utility main menu for the UEFI. Depending  
on the version of the firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these  
descriptions.  
v System Information  
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes  
through other choices in the Setup Utility, some of those changes are reflected in  
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system  
information. This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
System Summary  
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,  
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,  
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.  
When you make configuration changes through other options in the Setup  
Utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change  
settings directly in the system summary.  
Product Data  
138 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or  
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and  
diagnostics code, and the version and date.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v System Settings  
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.  
Processors  
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.  
Memory  
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings.  
Devices and I/O Ports  
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output  
(I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports; configure remote console  
redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers, the SAS/SATA  
controller, SATA optical drive channels, and PCI slots. If you disable a device,  
it cannot be configured, and the operating system will not be able to detect it  
(this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).  
Power  
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,  
processors, and performance states.  
Legacy Support  
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.  
- Force Legacy Video on Boot  
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does  
not support UEFI video output standards.  
- Rehook INT 19h  
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the  
boot process. The default is Disable.  
- Legacy Thunk Support  
Select this choice to enable or disable UEFI to interact with PCI mass  
storage devices that are non-UEFI compliant.  
Integrated Management Module  
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated  
management module.  
- POST Watchdog Timer  
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.  
- POST Watchdog Timer Value  
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.  
- Reboot System on NMI  
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt  
(NMI) occurs. Enable is the default.  
- Commands on USB Interface Preference  
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on  
IMM.  
- Network Configuration  
Select this choice to view the systems-management network interface port,  
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and the host name;  
define the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address;  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
specify whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM  
IP address; save the network changes.  
- Reset IMM to Defaults  
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.  
- Reset IMM  
Select this choice to reset IMM.  
System Security  
Select this choice to view or configure Trusted Platform Module (TPM)  
support.  
Adapters and UEFI Drivers  
Select this choice to view information about the UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0  
compliant adapters and drivers installed in the server.  
Network  
Select this choice to view or configure the network device options, such as  
iSCSI, PXE, and network devices.  
Note: The configuration forms for UEFI 2.1 and greater compliant add-on  
network devices might be located here.  
v Date and Time  
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format  
(hour:minute:second).  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v Start Options  
Select this choice to view or boot to devices, including the startup sequence. The  
server starts from the first boot record that it finds.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
v Boot Manager  
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot  
from a file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting.  
v System-event Logs  
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the  
error messages in the system event logs. You can use the arrow keys to move  
between pages in the error log.  
The system-event logs contain all event and error messages that have been  
generated during POST, by the systems-management interface handler, and by  
the system-service processor. Run the diagnostics programs to get more  
information about error codes that occur. See the Hardware Maintenance Manual  
for instructions for running the diagnostics programs.  
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are  
no other error indications, clear the IMM system-event log. Also, after you  
complete a repair or correct an error, clear the IMM system-event log to turn off  
the system-error LED on the front of the server.  
POST Event Viewer  
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the POST error  
messages.  
System-event Log  
Select this choice to view the IMM system-event log.  
Clear System-event Log  
Select this choice to clear the IMM system-event log.  
140 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v User Security  
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See “Passwords” for more  
information.  
This choice is on the full and limited Setup Utility menu.  
Set Power-on Password  
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Power-on  
password” on page 142 for more information.  
Clear Power-on Password  
Select this choice to clear a power-on password. See “Power-on password”  
on page 142 for more information.  
Set Administrator Password  
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An  
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it  
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If an administrator password is set,  
the full Setup Utility menu is available only if you type the administrator  
password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Power-on  
– Clear Administrator Password  
Select this choice to clear an administrator password. For more information,  
v Save Settings  
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.  
v Restore Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and  
restore the previous settings.  
v Load Default Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and  
restore the factory settings.  
v Exit Setup  
Select this choice to exit from the Setup Utility. If you have not saved the  
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to  
save the changes or exit without saving them.  
Passwords  
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on  
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full  
Setup Utility menu only.  
If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to  
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup Utility menu.  
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it  
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. If you set only an administrator  
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but  
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup Utility menu.  
If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a  
system administrator, you can type either password to complete the system startup.  
A system administrator who types the administrator password has access to the full  
Setup Utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority to set,  
change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
password has access to only the limited Setup Utility menu; the user can set,  
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given  
the user that authority.  
Power-on password  
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup will  
not be completed until you type the power-on password. You can use any  
combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.  
If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in the  
following way:  
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the  
password prompt. Start the Setup Utility and reset the power-on password.  
Administrator password  
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it  
limits access to the full Setup Utility menu. You can use any combination of up to  
seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.  
Configuring RAID controllers  
The following table lists the various utilities available to configure RAID controllers  
before an operating system is installed.  
Table 11. RAID configuration utilities  
RAID configuration  
utility  
Where to find more  
information  
Description  
Location  
EasyStartup RAID  
configuration utility  
EasyStartup DVD  
v For use with all  
factory-supported  
RAID controllers  
v Automatically  
detects hardware  
and lists all  
supported RAID  
configurations  
v Configures one  
disk array per  
controller using all  
drives currently  
attached to the  
controller  
v Creates a RAID  
response file that  
can be used to  
configure RAID  
controllers on  
similarly configured  
Lenovo servers.  
142 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 11. RAID configuration utilities (continued)  
RAID configuration  
utility  
Where to find more  
information  
Description  
Location  
MegaRAID BIOS  
Configuration Utility  
(WebBIOS)  
For:  
In system firmware.  
To access:  
v ServeRAID-MR10i  
controller  
v Use UEFI Setup  
Utility.  
v
ServeRAID-MR10is v Press Ctrl + H at  
controller  
the WebBIOS  
prompt during  
startup.  
v
ServeRAID-MR10m  
controller  
LSI Logic MPT Setup For:  
Utility  
In system firmware.  
To access:  
v ServeRAID-BR10i  
controller  
v Use UEFI Setup  
Utility.  
v ServeRAID-BR10ie  
controller  
v Press Ctrl + C at  
the LSI prompt  
during startup.  
Using the LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array  
of independent disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in  
this document.  
v Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to:  
– Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive  
– Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive  
– Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives  
The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays.  
You can use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID  
1E (IME), and RAID 0 (IS) for a single pair of attached devices. If you install a  
different type of RAID adapter, follow the instructions in the documentation that  
comes with the adapter to view or change settings for attached devices.  
When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage  
arrays, consider the following information:  
v The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following  
features:  
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)  
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks plus up to two  
optional hot spares. All data on the primary disk can be migrated.  
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as  
RAID 1E)  
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight  
disks, including up to two optional hot spares. All data on the array disks will  
be deleted.  
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)  
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All  
data on the array disks will be deleted.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array  
can have different capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all  
have the capacity of the smallest hard disk drive.  
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure  
a RAID 1 (mirrored) array after you have installed the operating system, you will  
lose access to any data or applications that were previously stored on the  
secondary drive of the mirrored pair.  
v If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that  
comes with the controller for information about viewing and changing settings for  
attached devices.  
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program  
To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 3 minutes after the server is connected to power, the  
power-control button becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an  
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the  
full Setup Utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited  
Setup Utility menu is available.  
3. Select System Settings Adapters and UEFI drivers.  
4. Select Please refresh this page first and press Enter.  
5. Select the device driver that is applicable for the SAS controller in the server  
(for example, LSI Logic Fusion MPT SAS Driver).  
6. To perform storage-management tasks, see the SAS controller documentation.  
When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;  
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.  
Formatting a hard disk drive  
Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk  
that you want to save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.  
Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a  
mirrored pair.  
To format a drive, do the following:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you  
want to format and press Enter.  
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.  
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.  
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down  
Arrow keys. To scroll left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or  
the End key. Press Alt+D.  
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.  
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives  
To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, do the following:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for which you want to  
create an array.  
2. Select RAID Properties.  
144 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.  
4. In the RAID Disk column, use the Spacebar or Minus (-) key to select [Yes]  
(select) or [No] (deselect) to select or deselect a drive from a RAID disk.  
5. Continue to select drives, using the Spacebar or Minus (-) key, until you have  
selected all the drives for your array.  
6. Press C to create the disk array.  
7. Select Save changes then exit this menu to create the array.  
8. Exit the Setup Utility.  
Using the WebBIOS utility  
The WebBIOS configuration utility enables you to create and manage RAID  
configurations on LSI SAS controllers. The WebBIOS utility resides in the SAS  
controller BIOS and operates independently of the operating system. The WebBIOS  
utility provides a configuration wizard to guide you through the configuration of  
virtual disks and physical arrays.  
Starting the WebBIOS utility  
Do the following to start the WebBIOS utility and access the main menu:  
1. After you turn on the power and when the computer is starting, you are  
prompted to press Ctrl + H when the following message is displayed:  
Copyright© LSI Logic Corporation  
Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS  
2. Select an adapter from the list.  
3. Click Start. The main WebBIOS utility interface is displayed. You can toggle  
between the physical view and logical view of the storage devices that are  
connected to the controller. Click Physical View or Logical View on the menu  
in the left pane to change the view.  
Main menu of the WebBIOS utility  
The main menu includes the following options:  
Adapter Properties  
From this view, you can display and modify the properties of the SAS that is  
currently selected.  
Scan Devices  
From this view, you can re-scan the physical and virtual disks for any  
changes in the drive status or physical configuration.  
Virtual Disks  
From this view, you can display and modify the virtual disk properties,  
delete virtual disks, initialize disks, and perform other tasks.  
Physical Drives  
From this view, you can view the physical drive properties, create hot-spare  
disks, and perform other tasks.  
Configuration Wizard  
Select this to start the Configuration Wizard and create a new storage  
configuration, clear a configuration, or add a new configuration.  
Adapter Selection  
From this view, you can select a different SAS adapter. Then, you can view  
information about the adapter and the drives connected to it, or create a  
new configuration for the adapter.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Physical View or Logical View  
Select this to toggle between the Physical View and Logical View.  
Events  
From this view, you can display the system events in the Event Information  
page.  
Exit  
Select this to exit the WebBIOS utility and continue with the system boot.  
Creating a storage configuration using the Configuration Wizard  
Do the following to start create a storage configuration:  
1. Click Configuration Wizard to start the wizard.  
2. Select a configuration option:  
Attention: If you select Clear Configuration or New Configuration, all  
existing data in the configuration is deleted. Make a backup copy of any data  
that you want to keep before selecting these options.  
Clear Configuration  
Clears the existing configuration.  
New Configuration  
Clears the existing configuration and lets you create a new  
configuration.  
Add Configuration  
Retains the existing storage configuration and adds new drives to it (this  
does not cause any data loss).  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select a configuration mode from the following options:  
Custom Configuration  
In this mode, you can control all attributes of the new storage  
configuration.  
Auto Configuration and Redundancy  
This mode automatically creates an optimal RAID 1 or RAID 5  
configuration, providing data redundancy.  
Auto Configuration without Redundancy  
This mode automatically creates a non-redundant RAID 0 configuration.  
5. Click Next to continue.  
Viewing and changing properties  
You can view information for one LSI SAS at a time. If your system has multiple LSI  
SAS adapters, click Adapter Selection on the main view. To view the properties for  
the currently selected adapter, click Adapter Properties on the main WebBIOS  
screen.  
Viewing and changing virtual disk properties  
On the WebBIOS main screen, select a virtual disk from the list and click Virtual  
Disk.  
The Properties panel displays the RAID level, state, size, and stripe size.  
The Policies panel lists the virtual disk policies that were defined when the storage  
configuration was created. To change any of these policies, select a policy from the  
146 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
menu and click Change. The Operations panel lists operations that can be  
performed on the virtual disk. Select the operation and click Go. Then choose from  
the following operations:  
v Select Del to delete this virtual disk.  
v Select Locate and the LEDs flash on the physical drives used by this virtual disk.  
v Select Fast or Slow to initialize this virtual disk.  
Attention: Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the virtual disk  
that you want to save. All data on the virtual disk is lost when you initialize it.  
Using the EasyStartup DVD  
The EasyStartup DVD simplifies the process of configuring your RAID controller and  
installing an operating system. The program works in conjunction with your  
Windows or Linux operating-system installation disc to automate the process of  
installing the operating system and associated device drivers.  
If you did not receive an EasyStartup DVD with your server, you can download an  
image from the Lenovo Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
The EasyStartup program has the following features:  
v Self-booting DVD  
v Easy-to-use, language-selectable interface  
v Integrated help system  
v Automatic hardware detection  
v RAID configuration utility  
v Device drivers (based on the server model and detected devices)  
v Selectable partition size and file system type  
v Support for Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE Server operating systems  
v Installs the operating system and device drivers in an unattended mode to save  
time  
v Creates a reusable response file that can be used with similarly configured  
Lenovo servers to make future installations even faster.  
Before you use the EasyStartup DVD  
Functionality and supported operating systems can vary with different versions of  
the EasyStartup program. To learn more about the version you have, do the  
following:  
1. Insert the EasyStartup DVD and restart the server.  
2. Advance to the Home screen.  
3. Click Compatibility notes. The compatibility notes feature provides detailed  
information about the operating systems and server configurations supported by  
that version of the EasyStartup program.  
4. Click User Guide. The User Guide provides an overview of the various  
functions provided by that version of the EasyStartup program.  
Before using the EasyStartup program to install an operating system, make sure  
any external storage devices and fiber channels are configured correctly.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring RAID  
The RAID configuration feature that is part of the EasyStartup program enables you  
to view and change RAID settings for supported RAID controllers. Through this  
feature, you have the ability to select one RAID level for each installed controller,  
and the program automatically uses the discs currently attached to the controller to  
support that RAID level. This method satisfies most users' needs.  
If you have a need to assign a primary and secondary RAID on the same controller  
and assign some of your discs to the primary RAID and some to the secondary  
RAID, you can use either of the following methods:  
v Manually remove the drives that you do not want included in your primary  
array before you configure your RAID controller through the EasyStartup  
program.  
This method enables you to use the EasyStartup program to configure your RAID  
controller and install the operating system. After the operating system is installed,  
reinstall the drives and use the RAID configuration utility provided in the firmware  
to configure the secondary RAID.  
v Configure the controller using the RAID configuration utility provided in the  
firmware before you use the EasyStartup program.  
For details, see “Configuring RAID controllers” on page 142. After your RAID  
controller is configured, start the EasyStartup program and install your operating  
system.  
EasyStartup overview  
The EasyStartup program requires a supported Lenovo server with an enabled,  
startable (bootable) DVD drive. In addition to the EasyStartup DVD, you also must  
have the operating-system installation CD or DVD and the product key or  
installation number for the operating system (if provided).  
The EasyStartup program performs the following tasks:  
v Detects installed hardware devices  
v Guides you through the process of configuring one or more RAID controllers  
v Guides you through the process of creating a response file for the unattended  
installation of the operating system  
v Enables you to create scripts or commands that run at the end of the  
operating-system installation process  
v Facilitates the installation of the ThinkServer EasyManage products and  
DVD-burning software (Windows installation only)  
v Prepares the hard disk for installation  
v Prompts you to insert the operating-system installation disc  
v Initiates an unattended installation of the operating system and device drivers  
Setup and configuration  
When you start the EasyStartup DVD, you will be prompted for the following:  
v Select the language in which you want to view the program.  
v Select the language of the keyboard you will be using with the program.  
Note: The following language keyboards are supported: English, French, German,  
Spanish, Japanese, Korean, Turkish, Italian, and Dutch.  
148 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You will then see one or more reminders about configuring storage devices, and  
then you will be presented with the Lenovo License Agreement. Read the license  
agreement carefully. You must agree with terms in order to continue.  
After agreeing to the license agreement, you will be given the following choices:  
v Continue to the main program interface  
v Use a shortcut to install an operating system based on a response file that you  
previously created using the EasyStartup program  
v Use a short cut to configure RAID controllers based on a RAID response file that  
you previously created using the EasyStartup program  
If you continue to the main program interface, you will have the following selectable  
options:  
v Compatibility notes: This selection provides information about the operating  
systems and server configurations supported by that version of the EasyStartup  
program.  
v User Guide: This selection provides information about the features provided by  
that version of the EasyStartup program.  
v Hardware list: This selection displays a list of hardware devices detected by the  
EasyStartup program.  
v Configure RAID: This selection enables you to view the current RAID  
configuration for each installed RAID controller and make changes if needed.  
v Install operating system: This selection displays a series of choices and  
prompts to collect information required for installation, prepares the hard disk for  
installation, and then initiates the installation process using the user-provided  
operating-system installation CD or DVD.  
v About: This selection displays version information and legal notices.  
Typical operating-system installation  
When you select Install operating system, you will be prompted for information  
required for the installation. The prompts vary depending on the operating system  
selected. This section describes the tasks associated with a typical Windows  
operating-system installation. Each task must be completed in order before moving  
to the next task.  
Note: Ensure that your RAID controller is correctly configured before you select an  
operating system to install.  
v Select operating system: This task enables you to select the operating system  
that you will be installing.  
v Select disk: This task enables you to select the disk where you want to install  
the operating system.  
Note: The disk that you select must be set as the boot disk in UEFI.  
v Partition options: This task enables you to choose whether you want to  
repartition the selected drive or use an existing partition.  
v Partition settings: This task enables you to choose the file system type and  
define the partition size.  
v Installation settings: This task prompts you for user and system settings, the  
operating-system product key, and the administrator password.  
v Network settings: This task prompts you for domain and workgroup settings,  
Ethernet controller type, IP address settings, DNS settings, and WINS address  
settings.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Install applications: This task enables you to run custom commands or scripts  
at the end of the installation process. It also facilitates the installation of  
DVD-burning software and EasyManage software products.  
v Install Windows components: This task enables you to install optional  
Windows components such as IIS, ASP.NET, and SNMP.  
v Confirm settings: This task enables you to review all of the information you  
provided.  
v Save response file: This task gives you the option of saving the information on  
a diskette or USB device as a response file for future installations on similarly  
configured Lenovo servers.  
v Start installation: This task starts the actual installation process. First, the disk  
is prepared using the disk and partition information you specified. Then you are  
prompted to insert the operating-system disk, and the operating system is  
installed using the information that you specified.  
Installing your operating system without using EasyStartup  
If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the  
EasyStartup program to install your operating system, do the following to download  
the latest operating-system installation instructions from the Lenovo Spport Web  
site:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual  
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Select the operating system that you want from the Operating system list, and  
click Continue.  
5. Click Operating system installation to download instructions to install the  
operating system.  
Using the Boot Manager program  
The Boot Manager program is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program  
that you can use to temporarily redefine the first startup device without changing  
settings in the Setup Utility.  
To use the Boot Manager program, do the following:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Restart the server.  
3. When the prompt <F12> Select Boot Device is displayed, press F12. If a  
bootable USB mass storage device is installed, a submenu item (USB  
Key/Disk) is displayed.  
4. Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to select an item from the Boot  
Selection Menu and press Enter.  
The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the  
Setup Utility.  
150 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program  
The Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You  
can use it to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize  
where the network startup option appears in the startup sequence.  
To enable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility program, do the following:  
1. From the Setup Utility main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports and press  
Enter.  
2. Select Enable/Disable onboard device(s) and press Enter.  
3. Select Ethernet and press Enter.  
4. Select Enable and press Enter.  
5. Exit to the main menu and select Save Settings and press Enter.  
Configuring the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet controller  
The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an  
interface for connecting to a 10-Mbps, 100-Mbps, or 1-Gbps network and provides  
full duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception  
of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server supports auto-negotiation,  
the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or  
1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and  
automatically operates at that rate and mode.  
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controller. However, you must  
install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the controller. To  
find updated information about configuring the controllers, do the following:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual  
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
Updating the firmware  
Important:: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated  
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of  
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
The firmware for the server is periodically updated and is available for download on  
the Lenovo Web site. To check for the latest level of firmware, such as the server  
firmware, vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor  
firmware, do the following:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual  
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
Download the latest firmware for the server; then, install the firmware, using the  
instructions that are included with the downloaded files.  
When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the  
server with the latest version of the firmware that is stored in memory on the device  
or restore the pre-existing firmware from a diskette or CD image.  
The following items are downloadable from the Web at  
v Server firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.  
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.  
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.  
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the ServeRAID adapter.  
v SAS/SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS/SATA controller on the system  
board.  
Major components contain VPD code. You can select to update the VPD code  
during the server firmware update procedure.  
Starting the backup server firmware  
The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware (formerly  
BIOS firmware). This is a secondary copy of the server firmware that you update  
only during the process of updating the server firmware. If the primary copy of the  
server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.  
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the  
J6 jumper in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).  
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After  
the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the J6 jumper back to  
the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
Recovering the server firmware  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
If the server firmware has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during  
an update, you can recover the server firmware in one of two ways:  
v In-band method: Recover server firmware, using either the boot block jumper  
(Automated Boot Recovery) and a server Firmware Update Package Service  
Pack.  
v Out-of-band method: Use the IMM Web Interface to update the firmware, using  
the latest server firmware update package.  
Note: You can obtain a server update package from one of the following sources:  
v Download the server firmware update from the World Wide Web.  
v Contact your Lenovo service representative.  
152 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To download the server firmware update package from the World Wide Web, do the  
following:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual  
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
The flash memory of the server consists of a primary bank and a backup bank. It is  
essential that you maintain the backup bank with a bootable firmware image. If the  
primary bank becomes corrupted, you can either manually boot the backup bank  
with the boot block jumper, or in the case of image corruption, this will occur  
automatically with the Automated Boot Recovery function.  
In-band manual recovery method  
To recover the server firmware and restore the server operation to the primary  
bank, do the following:  
2. Turn off the server, and disconnect all power cords and external cables.  
3. Unlock and remove the server cover (see “Removing the side cover” on page  
4. Locate the UEFI boot recovery jumper (JP6) on the system board.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
UEFI boot recover jumper (JP6)  
Clear CMOS jumper (JP1)  
SW6 switch block  
5. Move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI  
recovery mode.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Reinstall the server cover (see “Installing the side cover” on page 134); then,  
reconnect all power cords.  
7. Restart the server. The power-on self-test (POST) starts.  
8. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware  
update package that you downloaded.  
9. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the  
firmware update package readme file.  
10. Copy the downloaded firmware update package into a directory.  
11. From a command line, type filename-s, where filename is the name of the  
executable file that you downloaded with the firmware update package.  
12. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables, and  
then remove the server cover.  
13. Move the UEFI boot recovery jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and  
2).  
14. Reinstall the server cover, and then reconnect all the power cables.  
15. Restart the server.  
jumpers and switches.  
In-band automated boot recovery method  
Note: Use this method if the system board error LED is lit and there is a log entry  
or Booting Backup Image is displayed on the firmware splash screen; otherwise,  
use the in-band manual recovery method.  
1. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware update  
package that you downloaded.  
2. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the  
firmware update package readme file.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. At the firmware splash screen, press F3 when prompted to restore to the  
primary bank. The server boots from the primary bank.  
Out-of-band method: See the IMM documentation.  
Automated boot recovery (ABR)  
If the server is booting up and the IMM detects problems with the server firmware in  
the primary bank, it will automatically switch to the backup firmware bank and give  
you the opportunity to recover the primary bank. To recover to the server firmware  
primary bank, do the following:  
1. Restart the server.  
2. When the prompt press F3 to restore to primary is displayed, press F3 to  
recover the primary bank. Pressing F3 will restart the server.  
Three boot failure  
Configuration changes, such as added devices or adapter firmware updates can  
cause the server to fail POST (power-on self-test). If this occurs on three  
consecutive boot attempts, the server will temporarily uses the default configuration  
values and automatically goes to F1 Setup. To solve the problem, do the following:  
1. Undo any configuration changes that you made recently and restart the server.  
154 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Remove any devices that you added recently and restart the server.  
3. If the problem remains, go to the Setup utility and select Load Default  
Settings, and then click Save to restore the server factory settings.  
Using the integrated management module  
The integrated management module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions  
that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It  
combines service processor functions, video controller, and (when an optional  
virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a single chip.  
The IMM supports the following basic systems-management features:  
v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan  
failure, and power supply failure.  
v EasyLED indicators to report errors that occur with fans, power supplies,  
microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors.  
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)  
disables a failing DIMM that is detected during POST, and the IMM lights the  
associated system-error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.  
v System-event log (SEL).  
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.  
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR).  
v A virtual media key, which enables remote presence support (remote video,  
remote keyboard/mouse, and remote storage).  
v Automatic microprocessor disable on failure and restart in a two-microprocessor  
configuration when one microprocessor signals an internal error. When one of the  
microprocessors fail, the server will disable the failing microprocessor and restart  
with the other microprocessor.  
v Nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) detection and reporting.  
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating  
system hangs and the operating-system watchdog timer times-out. The IMM  
might be configured to watch for the operating-system watchdog timer and reboot  
the system after a timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise, the IMM  
allows the administrator to generate a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) by pressing  
an NMI button on the system board for an operating-system memory dump. ASR  
is supported by IPMI.  
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and  
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support.  
v Serial port redirection over telnet or ssh.  
v Serial over LAN (SOL).  
v Active Energy Manager.  
v Query power-supply input power.  
v PECI 2 support.  
v Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset,  
schedule power control).  
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).  
v Operating-system failure blue screen capture.  
v Command-line interface.  
v Configuration save and restore.  
v PCI configuration data.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Boot sequence manipulation.  
The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities:  
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)  
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management  
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue  
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the  
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file  
as a script.  
v Serial over LAN  
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote  
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,  
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet  
client application can access the SOL connection.  
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of  
the integrated management module (IMM). When the optional Virtual Media Key is  
installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. The virtual media  
key is required to enable the integrated remote presence and blue-screen capture  
features. Without the virtual media key, you will not be able to access the network  
remotely to mount or unmount drives or images on the client system. However, you  
can still access the Web interface without the key.  
After the virtual media key is installed in the server, it is authenticated to determine  
whether it is valid. If the key is not valid, you receive a message from the Web  
interface (when you attempt to start the remote presence feature) indicating that the  
hardware key is required to use the remote presence feature.  
The virtual media key has an LED. When this LED is lit and green, it indicates that  
the key is installed and functioning correctly. When the LED is not lit, it indicates  
that the key might not be installed correctly.  
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:  
v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1280 x 1024 at 75 Hz,  
regardless of the system state  
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote  
client  
v Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote  
client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are  
available for use by the server  
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a  
virtual drive  
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM  
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A  
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the  
cause of the hang condition.  
Enabling the remote presence feature  
To enable the remote presence feature, do the following:  
156 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Install the virtual media key into the dedicated slot on the system board (see  
2. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,  
the power-control button becomes active.  
Obtaining the IP address for the IMM  
To access the Web interface, you need the IP address for the IMM. You can obtain  
the IMM IP address through the Setup Utility. The server comes with a default IP  
address for the IMM of 192.168.70.125. To locate the IP address, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,  
the power-control button becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. (This prompt is displayed  
on the screen for only a few seconds. You must press F1 quickly.) If you have  
set both a power-on password and an administrator password, you must type  
the administrator password to access the full Setup Utility menu.  
3. From the Setup Utility main menu, select System Settings.  
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.  
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.  
6. Find the IP address and write it down.  
7. Exit from the Setup Utility.  
Logging on to the Web interface  
To log on to the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, do the  
following:  
1. Open a Web browser and in the address or URL field, type the IP address or  
host name of the IMM to which you want to connect.  
Note: The IMM defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM  
assigns a static IP address of 192.168.70.125.  
2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM  
for the first time, you can obtain the user name and password from your system  
administrator. All login attempts are documented in the event log.  
Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of  
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not a the letter O). You have read/write  
access. You must change the default password the first time you log on.  
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is  
provided. The IMM will log you off of the Web interface if your browser is  
inactive for the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.  
4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick  
view of the system status.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnostics programs and messages  
The diagnostics programs are the primary method of testing the major components  
of the server. As you run the diagnostics programs, text messages are displayed on  
the screen and are saved in the test log. A diagnostics text message indicates that  
a problem has been detected and provides the action you should take as a result of  
the text message.  
Make sure that the server has the latest version of the diagnostics programs. To  
download the latest version, do the following:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual  
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
Utilities are available to reset and update the diagnostics code on the integrated  
USB flash device, if the diagnostic partition becomes damaged and does not start  
the diagnostic programs. For more information and to download the utilities, go to  
The DSA diagnostic programs collect information about the following aspects of the  
system:  
v System configuration  
v Network interfaces and settings  
v Hardware inventory, including PCI and USB information  
v Drive health information  
v SAS/SATA RAID and controller configuration  
v Event logs for ServeRAID controllers and service processors  
The DSA diagnostics programs can also provide diagnostics for the following  
system components, if they are installed in the system:  
v BroadCom Dual Gigabit Ethernet  
v Optical drives  
v Hard disk drives  
v SAS/SATA RAID controller  
v Integrated management module (IMM)  
v Trusted Platform Module chip  
v Memory  
v Microprocessor  
Running the diagnostics programs  
To run the DSA Preboot diagnostics programs, do the following:  
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.  
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.  
3. When the prompt <F2> Diagnostics is displayed, press F2.  
158 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostics program might appear to be unresponsive  
for an unusual length of time when you start the program. This is normal  
operation while the program loads.  
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostics  
program.  
Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostics environment, you  
must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostics  
environment again.  
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the  
DSA interactive menu.  
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.  
If the diagnostics programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem  
remains during normal server operations, a software error might be the cause. If  
you suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with your software.  
A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,  
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will  
not occur the next time you run the diagnostics programs.  
Exception: If multiple error codes or LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, the  
error might be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor socket. See  
“Microprocessor problems” on page 168 for information about diagnosing  
microprocessor problems.  
If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try  
to run the diagnostics programs again. If the problem remains, replace the  
component that was being tested when the server stopped.  
For a list of diagnostics messages, see the Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
Advanced Settings Utility program  
The Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup Utility  
for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to modify  
UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the system to  
access the Setup Utility.  
You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence  
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced  
systems-management capabilities.  
In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI  
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.  
Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the  
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting  
environments through a batch-processing mode.  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing EasyManage software  
You can install the ThinkServerEasyManage Core Server program from the  
EasyManage CD or you can download and install the program from  
http://www.lenovo.com/support. After one instance of the EasyManage Core Server  
has been installed, you can use the EasyManage Agent installer to install the agent  
on other servers and clients on the network.  
Also, the EasyManage program provides an option to either install the EasyManage  
Agent as part of the operating-system installation process or install a desktop icon  
to assist with the installation of the EasyManage Core Server after the operating  
system has been installed.  
Installation requirements  
Before installing EasyManage software on your server, your environment must meet  
the following requirements:  
v Microsoft® Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008 is installed on the  
server where you intend to install the Core Server.  
v The original Windows Server operating-system installation CDs are available in  
case files are needed while installing the prerequisites.  
v The server has Internet access to obtain prerequisites and to activate the  
software after the installation is complete.  
v The server has a static IP address.  
v The server is not a domain controller. However, it is recommended to have the  
server join a domain.  
v The account that you use to log in and to install the Core Server has  
Administrator privileges on the server with full read/write access. Ideally, this  
account is also a Domain Administrator account. This account will be used to  
create the initial administrator-level account used to log in to the EasyManage  
console.  
v Any previous agent from EasyManage or LANDesk must be removed prior to  
installing the Core Server and Management Console.  
Installation order  
The order in which you install the operating system and Windows Components is  
critical to install EasyManage software successfully. To ensure a clean, working  
installation of EasyManage software, use the following installation order:  
1. Install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 or Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32-bit  
with the latest Service Pack.  
2. Install the following Windows Components: See “Installing Windows 2003  
3. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
4. (For Windows Server 2003 only) Download Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0  
Service Pack 1 or newer from the following Web site: http://www.microsoft.com/  
&DisplayLang=en. Install the software using the default settings.  
5. (For both Windows Server 2003 and 2008) Download Microsoft Web Services  
Enhancement 2.0 Service Pack 3 (LANDesk Process Manager only) from the  
&DisplayLang=en. Install the software using the default settings.  
160 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: This specific version is required.  
6. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
7. Launch the EasyManage installation.  
8. After EasyManage is installed, enable Security and Patch Manager to obtain the  
LANDesk 8.8 Software Updates. In the console application, click Help ->  
LANDesk -> Security Updates for a guide to configuring Security and Patch  
Manager.  
9. Install Adobe Flash Player 9 if you plan to use the Management Console  
functions from the same server on which the Core Server is installed. You can  
obtain Adobe Flash Player 9 from the Adobe Web site:  
Installing Windows 2003 components on the Core Server  
To install IIS, ASP.Net, and SNMP on the Core Server, do the following procedure  
for each component:  
1. In the Windows Control Panel, double-click Add or Remove Programs.  
2. In the toolbar on the left, click Add/Remove Windows Components to launch  
the Windows Components Wizard.  
3. Select from the Components list:  
v When installing IIS and ASP.NET, click Application Server; then, click  
Details.  
v When installing SNMP, click Management and Monitoring Tools; then, click  
Details.  
4. Select the component that you want to install:  
v When installing IIS, select Internet Information Services (IIS); then, click  
OK.  
v When installing ASP.NET, select ASP.NET; then, click OK.  
v When installing SNMP, select Simple Network Management Protocol; then,  
click OK.  
5. Click Next to continue the wizard.  
6. If prompted, insert the original Windows operating-system CD. If the autorun  
launches when you insert the CD, close it. The Windows Components Wizard  
will automatically detect and install the necessary files.  
7. Click Finish.  
Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components  
To install the Windows Server 2008 32-bit components necessary for an  
EasyManage core server installation, do the following:  
Installing Web Server Role (IIS)  
To install the Web Server Role (IIS), do the following:  
1. Click Start -> Server Manager.  
2. Under Roles Summary, click Add Roles. The Add Roles wizard appears.  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select the check box next to Web Server (IIS). A dialog box displays the  
additional features that are required.  
5. Click Add Required Features, then click Next. In the list of additional role  
services that can be installed, ensure that the follow are checked:  
v HTTP Redirection  
Chapter 6. Configuring the server 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Static Content  
v ASP.NET  
v ASP  
v CGI  
v Server Side Includes  
v Windows Authentication  
v IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility  
Note: When you select ASP.Net or ASP, a dialog box displays the additional  
role services required. Click Add Required Role Services.  
6. Click Install.  
Note: If IIS is already installed and certain Role Services are still required,  
expand Roles in the tree view on the left in Server Manager and click Web  
Server (IIS), then click Add Role Services. Select the necessary role services  
and click Install.  
Installing Microsoft SNMP services  
To install Microsoft SNMP services, do the following:  
1. Click Add Features in the Features Summary section on the main page of  
Server Manager.  
2. Select the SNMP Services check box.  
3. Click Next, then Install.  
Uninstalling the LANDesk Software Agent  
If the Core Server has LANDesk agents on it from a previous Management Suite  
release, it will fail the autorun prerequisite check. You must remove the old agents  
by running uninstallwinclient.exe from the  
\Program Files\LANDesk\ManagementSuite folder.  
162 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting  
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve  
problems that might occur in the server.  
If you cannot locate and correct the problem using the information in this chapter,  
see the Hardware Maintenance Manual for more information.  
Troubleshooting tables  
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable  
symptoms.  
If you cannot find the problem in these tables, see the Hardware Maintenance  
Manual.  
If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not  
working, do the following before using the troubleshooting tables:  
1. Check the LEDs on the control panel or the system board.  
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.  
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.  
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.  
CD or DVD drive problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The CD or DVD drive is not  
recognized.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The SATA channel to which the CD or DVD drive is attached (primary or  
secondary) is enabled in the Setup Utility.  
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.  
v The correct device driver is installed for the CD or DVD drive.  
2. Run the CD or DVD drive diagnostics programs.  
3. Reseat the CD or DVD drive cable.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. CD or DVD drive cable  
b. CD or DVD drive  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A CD or DVD is not working  
correctly.  
1. Clean the CD or DVD.  
2. Run the CD or DVD drive diagnostics programs.  
3. Reseat the CD or DVD drive cable.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. CD or DVD drive cable  
b. CD or DVD drive  
The CD or DVD drive tray is not  
working.  
1. Make sure that the server is turned on.  
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release  
opening.  
3. Reseat the CD or DVD drive cable.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. CD or DVD drive cable  
b. CD or DVD drive  
Diskette drive problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The optional diskette drive  
activity LED stays lit, or the  
server bypasses the diskette  
drive.  
v If there is a diskette in the drive, make sure that:  
– The diskette drive cables are correctly and securely connected.  
– The diskette drive is enabled in the Setup Utility.  
– The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try another diskette if you have  
one.)  
– The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.  
– The diskette contains the necessary files to start the server.  
Your software program is working properly.  
v To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance between  
monitors and diskette drives is at least 76 mm (3 in.).  
If the problem remains, replace the internal diskette drive.  
164 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A cover lock is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a  
is not working, or a similar  
problem has occurred.  
trained service technician.  
Hard disk drive problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
Remove the drive that is indicated by the diagnostic tests; then, run the hard disk  
drive diagnostic test again. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the drive  
that you removed with a new one.  
Not all drives are recognized by  
the hard disk drive diagnostic  
test (the Fixed Disk Test).  
The server stops responding  
during the hard disk drive  
diagnostic test.  
Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when the server stopped  
responding, and run the diagnostic test again. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test  
runs successfully, replace the drive that you removed with a new one.  
A hard disk drive was not  
detected while the operating  
system was being started.  
Reseat all hard disk drives and cables; then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic  
tests again.  
A hard disk drive passes the  
diagnostic Fixed Disk Test or  
SCSI Attached Disk Test, but  
the problem remains.  
Run the diagnostic SCSI Attached Disk Test.  
Note: This test is supported on server models with RAID arrays that use the  
ServeRAID-BR10i, ServeRAID-MR10i, or ServeRAID-MR10is controllers or servers  
with SATA hard disk drives that use the onboard SATA/SAS controller to create  
RAID arrays. Use the Fixed Disk Test for SATA hard disk drives or servers that  
have RAID arrays.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intermittent problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A problem occurs only  
occasionally and is difficult to  
diagnose.  
1. Make sure that:  
v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and  
attached devices.  
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no  
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and  
shut down.  
2. Check the system-event log or IMM system-event log.  
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
All or some keys on the  
keyboard do not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The keyboard cable is securely connected.  
v The server and the monitor are turned on.  
2. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect  
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Keyboard  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
The mouse or pointing device  
does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.  
v The mouse or pointing-device drivers are installed correctly.  
v The server and the monitor are turned on.  
v The mouse option is enabled in the Setup Utility program.  
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB  
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it  
directly to the server.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Mouse or pointing device  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
166 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Memory problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The amount of system memory  
that is displayed is less than the  
amount of installed physical  
memory.  
1. Make sure that:  
v No error LEDs are lit on the control-panel assembly or on the system board.  
v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.  
v The memory modules are seated correctly.  
v You have installed the correct type of memory.  
v All DIMMs are enabled. The server might have automatically disabled a  
DIMM when it detected a problem.  
2. Check the POST event log for error message 289:  
v If a DIMM was disabled by a systems-management interrupt (SMI), replace  
the DIMM.  
3. Run memory diagnostics.  
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is over the  
minimum memory configuration (one 1 GB DIMM) and that you have installed  
the correct number of DIMMs.  
5. Reseat the DIMMs.  
6. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a  
branch are identified as failing.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.  
2. Replace the failing DIMM.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microprocessor problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A microprocessor LED is lit  
during POST, indicating that the  
startup (boot) microprocessor is  
not working correctly.  
1. Make sure that the server supports all the microprocessors and that the  
microprocessors match in speed and cache size.  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor  
b. VRM  
3. (Trained service technician only) If there is no indication of which  
microprocessor has failed, isolate the error by testing with one microprocessor  
at a time.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
5. (Trained service technician only) If there are multiple error codes or LEDs that  
indicate a microprocessor error, reverse the locations of the microprocessors or  
with a microprocessor socket.  
Monitor or video problems  
Some Lenovo monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your  
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for  
testing and adjusting the monitor. If you cannot diagnose the problem, call for  
service.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
Testing the monitor  
1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.  
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being  
tested on a different server.  
3. Run the diagnostics programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostics programs,  
the problem might be a video device driver.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) System board  
168 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The screen is blank.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power  
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.  
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are  
adjusted correctly.  
Important: In some memory configurations, the 3-3-3 beep code might sound  
during POST, followed by a blank monitor screen. If this occurs and the Boot  
Fail Count option in the Start Options of the Setup Utility program is enabled,  
you must restart the server three times to reset the configuration settings to the  
default configuration (the memory connector or bank of connectors enabled).  
2. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.  
3. Make sure that damaged server firmware is not affecting the video; see  
The monitor works when you  
turn on the server, but the  
screen goes blank when you  
start some application  
programs.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than the  
capability of the monitor.  
v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.  
2. Run video diagnostics.  
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see  
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,  
replace the system board.  
The monitor has screen jitter, or  
the screen image is wavy,  
unreadable, rolling, or distorted.  
1. If the monitor self-tests show the monitor is working correctly, consider the  
location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as  
transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause  
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this  
happens, turn off the monitor.  
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen  
discoloration.  
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on  
the monitor.  
Notes:  
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance  
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3  
in.).  
b. Non-Lenovo monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. Monitor cable  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Monitor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
Wrong characters appear on the  
screen.  
1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware with the correct  
2. Reseat the monitor cable.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Monitor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Optional-device problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A Lenovo optional device that  
was just installed does not  
work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The device is designed for the server.  
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the  
device is installed correctly.  
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.  
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup Utility program.  
Whenever memory or any other device is changed, you must update the  
configuration.  
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.  
3. Replace the device that you just installed.  
A Lenovo optional device that  
used to work does not work  
now.  
1. Make sure that all of the hardware and cable connections for the device are  
secure.  
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the  
device.  
3. Reseat the failing device.  
4. Replace the failing device.  
170 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The power-control button does  
not work (the server does not  
start).  
Note: The power-control button  
will not function until 1 to 3  
minutes after the server has  
been connected to ac power.  
1. Make sure that the control-panel assembly power-control button is working  
correctly:  
a. Disconnect the server power cords.  
b. Reconnect the power cords.  
c. Press the power-control button. If the server does not start, check the  
power-control button for damage.  
2. Make sure that:  
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working  
electrical outlet.  
v The power LEDs (ac, dc) are lit correctly.  
v The server power-on LED on the front information panel is flashing after ac  
power cord is connected and that it stays on after the power-button is  
pressed.  
v The server contains the correct type of DIMMs.  
v The DIMMs are correctly seated.  
v A POST beep code did not sound, indicating a memory initialization error.  
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.  
v The microprocessor is correctly installed.  
3. Reseat the following components:  
a. DIMMs  
b. Power-supply cables to all internal components  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) Power supply  
5. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the  
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply  
supports.  
The server does not turn off.  
1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power  
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI  
operating system, do the following:  
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.  
b. Turn off the server by holding the power-control button for 5 seconds.  
c. Restart the server.  
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,  
disconnect the ac power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the ac power  
cord and restart the server.  
2. (Trained service technician only) If the problem remains or if you are using an  
ACPI-aware operating system, suspect the system board.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The server unexpectedly shuts See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 173.  
down, and the LEDs on the  
control-panel assembly are not  
lit.  
Serial port problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
The number of serial ports that  
are identified by the operating  
system is less than the number  
of installed serial ports.  
1. Make sure that:  
v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup Utility program and  
none of the serial ports is disabled.  
v The serial port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.  
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.  
3. Replace the serial port adapter.  
A serial device does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
v The device is compatible with the server.  
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.  
v The device is connected to the correct connector.  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. Failing serial device  
b. Serial cable  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Failing serial device  
b. Serial cable  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
172 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
You suspect a software  
problem.  
1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:  
v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For  
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If  
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a  
memory-address conflict.  
v The software is designed to operate on the server.  
v Other software works on the server.  
v The software works on another server.  
2. If you receive any error messages when using the software, see the information  
that comes with the software for a description of the messages and suggested  
solutions to the problem.  
3. Contact your place of purchase of the software.  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Symptom  
Action  
A USB device does not work.  
1. Run USB diagnostics.  
2. Make sure that:  
v The correct USB device driver is installed.  
v The operating system supports USB devices.  
v A standard PS/2 keyboard or mouse is not connected to the server. If it is, a  
USB keyboard or mouse will not work during POST.  
3. Make sure that the USB configuration options are set correctly in the Setup  
Utility program.  
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and  
connect it directly to the server.  
Solving undetermined problems  
If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use  
the information in this section.  
If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or  
intermittent), see “Software problems.”  
Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged server firmware can cause  
undetermined problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the clear CMOS jumper to  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
you suspect that the server firmware is damaged, see “Recovering the server  
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies. If the LEDs indicate that the power  
supplies are working correctly, do the following:  
1. Turn off the server.  
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.  
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the  
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.  
v Any external devices.  
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).  
v Modem, printer, mouse, and non-Lenovo devices.  
v Each adapter.  
v Hard disk drives.  
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is two 1 GB DIMM  
on the system board.  
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:  
v One microprocessor  
v One 1 GB DIMM on the system board  
v One power supply  
v Power cord  
v ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter  
v System board  
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in  
the following order:  
a. Memory module  
b. Microprocessor  
c. System board  
If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the  
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the  
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the  
system board.  
If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,  
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.  
Solving SCSI problems  
Note: This information also applies to Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) problems.  
For any SCSI error message, one or more of the following devices might be  
causing the problem:  
v A failing SCSI device (adapter, drive, or controller)  
v An incorrect SCSI termination jumper setting  
v A missing or incorrectly installed SCSI terminator  
v A defective SCSI terminator  
v An incorrectly installed cable  
v A defective cable  
For any SCSI error message, follow these suggested actions in the order in which  
they are listed until the problem is solved:  
174 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Make sure that external SCSI devices are turned on before you turn on the  
server.  
2. Make sure that the cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.  
3. If an external SCSI device is attached, make sure that the external SCSI  
termination is set to automatic.  
4. Make sure that the last device in each SCSI chain is terminated correctly.  
5. Make sure that the SCSI devices are configured correctly.  
Solving power problems  
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist  
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause  
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To  
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:  
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.  
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for  
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.  
3. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal  
and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is  
required for the server to start (see “Solving undetermined problems” on page  
173 for the minimum configuration).  
4. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts  
successfully, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is  
isolated.  
If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, replace the components  
in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.  
Solving Ethernet controller problems  
The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating  
system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for information  
about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.  
Try the following procedures:  
v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server, are  
installed and that they are at the latest level.  
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.  
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is  
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.  
– If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use  
Category 5 cabling.  
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a  
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an  
X port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.  
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try  
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and  
duplex mode of the hub.  
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs  
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.  
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link  
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or  
cable or a problem with the hub.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller  
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet  
transmit/receive activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network are  
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.  
v Check the LAN activity LED on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit  
when data is active on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make  
sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers  
are installed.  
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.  
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same  
protocol.  
If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware  
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible  
causes of the error.  
POST  
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of  
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests  
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.  
Note: This server does not use beep codes for server status.  
If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when  
prompted, for POST to run.  
If POST detects a problem, an error message is displayed. See “POST error codes”  
on page 178 for more information.  
Event logs  
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs. Some  
of the error codes and messages in the logs are abbreviated.  
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and  
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the contents of the  
POST event log from the Setup Utility (see “Using the Setup Utility” on page  
v System-event log: This log contains messages that were generated during  
POST and all system status messages from the service processor. You can view  
the contents of the system-event log from the Setup Utility (see “Using the Setup  
Utility” on page 138 for more information).  
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not  
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically clear the system-event  
log through the Setup Utility (when the IMM logs an event that indicates that the  
log is more than 75% full). When you are troubleshooting an error, be sure to  
clear the system-event log so that you can find current errors more easily.  
Each system-event log entry is displayed on its own page. Messages are listed  
on the left side of the screen, and details about the selected message are  
displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry to the next,  
use the Up Arrow () and Down Arrow () keys.  
The system-event log indicates an assertion event when an event has occurred.  
It indicates a deassertion event when the event is no longer occurring.  
176 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a superset  
of IMM, POST, and systems-management interrupt (SMI) information that is in  
the system-event log. You can only access the event log through the IMM Web  
interface.  
v DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot  
program, and it contains merged contents of the system-event log and the IMM  
system-event log. You can view the DSA log from the DSA Preboot program (see  
Viewing event logs from the Setup Utility  
To view the event logs, do the following:  
1. Turn on the server.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a  
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the  
administrator password to view the event logs.  
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:  
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewers.  
v To view the IMM system-event log, select System Event Log.  
Viewing event logs without restarting the server  
When the server is not hung and the IMM is connected to a network, methods are  
available for you to view one or more event logs without having to restart the  
server.  
If you have installed Portable or Installable Dynamic System Analysis (DSA), you  
can use it to view the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM event log  
(as the ASM event log) or merged DSA log, which merges the contents of the  
system-event log and the IMM system-event log. You can also use DSA Preboot to  
view the DSA log, although you must restart the server to use DSA Preboot. To  
install Portable DSA or DSA Preboot or download a DSA Preboot CD image, do the  
following:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual  
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers  
and Storage from the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer TD200, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
If IPMItool is installed in the server, you can use it to view the system-event log.  
Most recent versions of the Linux operating system come with a current version of  
IPMItool. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver for more information.  
You can view the IMM system-event log through the Event Log link in the  
integrated management module (IMM) Web interface. For more information, see  
The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,  
depending on the condition of the server. The first three conditions generally do not  
require that you restart the server.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 12. Methods for viewing event logs  
Condition  
Action  
The server is not hung and is connected to a Run Portable or Installable DSA to view the  
network.  
event log or create an output file that you  
can send to Lenovo service and support.  
Alternatively, you can use IPMItool to view  
the system-event log.  
The server is not hung and is not connected Use IPMItool locally to view the  
to a network.  
system-event log.  
The server is not hung and the integrated  
In a Web browser, type the IP address for  
management module (IMM) is connected to a the IMM and go to the Event Log page. For  
network.  
more information, see “Obtaining the IP  
The server is hung.  
v If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the  
server and press F2 to start DSA Preboot  
and view the event logs.  
v If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the  
DSA Preboot CD and restart the server to  
start DSA Preboot and view the event  
logs.  
v Alternatively, you can restart the server  
and press F1 to start the Setup Utility and  
view the POST event log or system-event  
log. For more information, see “Event  
Clearing the event logs  
To clear the event logs, do the following:  
Note: The POST event log is automatically cleared each time the server is  
restarted.  
1. Turn on the server.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a  
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the  
administrator password to view the event logs.  
3. Use one of the following procedures:  
v To clear the IMM system-event log, select System Event Logs --> System  
Event Log. Select Clear System Event Log; then, press Enter twice.  
POST error codes  
The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to  
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or  
informational.  
178 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0010002  
Microprocessor not supported.  
1. Reseat the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time.  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 1.  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 2 (if installed.)  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove  
microprocessor 2 and restart the server.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Remove  
microprocessor 1 and install microprocessor 2 in  
the microprocessor 1 connector. Restart the  
server. If the error is corrected, then  
microprocessor 1 is bad and must be replaced.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time.  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 1.  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor 2.  
c. (Trained service technician only) System  
board.  
0011000  
0011002  
Invalid microprocessor type.  
Microprocessor mismatch.  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and  
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is  
lit) with a supported type (see  
1. Run the Setup Utility and select System  
Information System Summary Processor  
Details to view the microprocessor information to  
compare the installed microprocessor  
specifications.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and  
replace one of the microprocessors so that they  
both match.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0011004  
Microprocessor failed BIST.  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat  
microprocessor 2.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
001100A  
0050001  
Microcode updated failed.  
DIMM disabled.  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
microprocessor.  
1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat  
the DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
3. Run the Setup Utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see 8).  
0051003  
Uncorrectable DIMM error  
1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat  
the DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
3. Run the Setup Utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see8).  
0051006  
0051009  
DIMM mismatch detected  
No memory detected.  
Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in  
the correct sequence (see “Installing a memory  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
180 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
005100A  
No usable memory detected.  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory  
0058001  
0058007  
PFA threshold exceeded  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test (see  
the Hardware Maintenance Manual).  
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a  
lit LED on the system board.  
DIMM population is unsupported.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those  
that are identified and replace it with an identical  
pair of known good DIMMs, then restart the  
server.  
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to  
their original connectors, restarting the server after  
each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the DIMMs in  
the failed pair with identical known good DIMMs,  
restarting the server after each DIMM is installed.  
Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat this step until  
you have tested all removed DIMMs.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
0058008  
DIMM failed memory test.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, then restart the server after  
each:  
a. DIMM  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
00580A1  
Invalid DIMM population for mirroring mode  
1. If a fault LED is lit, resolve the failure.  
2. Install the DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
00580A4  
00580A5  
Memory population changed.  
Mirror failover complete  
Information only. Memory has been added, moved, or  
changed.  
Information only. Memory redundancy has been lost.  
Check the event log for uncorrected DIMM failure  
events.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0068002  
CMOS battery cleared.  
1. Reseat the battery.  
2. Clear the CMOS memory.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the following order, restarting the server after  
each one:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board.  
2011001  
PCI-X PERR  
1. Reseat all affected adapters.  
2. Update the PCI adapter firmware.  
3. Remove the adapter.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Adapter  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
2018001  
PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected error  
1. Reseat all affected adapters.  
2. Update the PCI adapter firmware.  
3. Remove the adapter.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Adapter  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
182 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
2018002  
Option ROM resource allocation failure  
Informational message that some devices might not  
be initialized.  
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in  
the PCI slots to change the load order of the  
optional-device ROM code.  
2. Run the Setup Utility, select Startup Options, and  
change the boot priority to change the load order  
of the optional-device ROM code.  
3. Run the Setup Utility and disable some other  
resources, if their functions are not being used, to  
make more space available.  
a. Select Startup Options, then Planar  
Ethernet (PXE/DHCP) to disable the  
integrated Ethernet controller ROM.  
b. Select Advanced Functions, then PCI Bus  
Control, then PCI ROM Control Execution to  
disable the ROM of the adapter in the PCI  
slots.  
c. Select Devices and I/O Ports to disable any  
of the integrated devices.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Each adapter  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
3xx0007 (xx  
can be 00 -  
19)  
Firmware fault detected, system halted  
1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level  
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear  
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the  
default values.  
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.  
3038003  
3048005  
Firmware corrupted  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings to recover the  
server firmware.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Booted secondary (backup) UEFI Image  
Information only. The backup switch was used to boot  
the secondary bank.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3048006  
Booted secondary (backup) UEFI image  
because of ABR  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings to recover the  
primary UEFI settings.  
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power  
source.  
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, then  
turn on the server.  
3058000A  
RTC date/time is incorrect  
1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup  
Utility, and then restart the server.  
2. Reseat the battery.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System  
board  
3058001  
System configuration invalid  
1. Run the Setup Utility, and select Save Settings.  
2. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
3. Reseat the following components one at a time in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Battery  
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, then it  
must be reseated by a trained service  
technician only)  
4. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the order shown, restarting the server each  
time:  
a. Battery  
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, then it  
must be replaced by a trained service  
technician only)  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
3058004  
Three boot failure  
1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new  
settings or newly installed devices.  
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable  
power source.  
3. Remove all hardware that is not listed on the  
Lenovo Web site at  
4. Make sure that the operating system is not  
corrupted.  
5. Run the Setup Utility, save the configuration, and  
then restart the server.  
184 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3108007  
System configuration restored to default  
settings  
Information only. This is message is usually  
associated with the CMOS battery clear event.  
3138002  
3808000  
Boot configuration error  
1. Remove any recent configuration changes made  
to the Setup Utility.  
2. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
IMM communication failure  
1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,  
and then reconnect the server to power and  
restart it.  
2. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
3. Make sure that the virtual media key is seated  
and not damaged.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3808002  
3808003  
3808004  
Error updating system configuration to IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then  
reconnect the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup Utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
Error retrieving system configuration from  
IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then  
reconnect the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup Utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
IMM system event log full  
v When using out-of-band, use the IMM Web  
interface or IPMItool to clear the logs from the  
operating system.  
v When using the local console:  
1. Run the Setup Utility.  
2. Select System Event Log.  
3. Select Clear System Event Log.  
4. Restart the server.  
3818001  
3818002  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update failed  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update aborted  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem  
is solved.  
v See the Hardware Maintenance Manual to determine which components are customer replaceable units  
(CRUs) and which components are field replaceable units (FRUs).  
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by a  
trained service technician.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3818003  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
flash lock failed  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3818004  
3818005  
3818006  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
system error  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Current Bank Core Root of Trust  
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature  
invalid  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature  
invalid  
1. Switch the server firmware bank to the backup  
bank.  
2. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
3. Switch the bank back to the primary bank.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3818007  
3828004  
CRTM update capsule signature invalid  
AEM power capping disabled  
1. Run the Setup Utility, select Load Default  
Settings, and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
1. Check the settings and the event logs.  
2. Make sure that the Active Energy Manager feature  
is enabled in the Setup Utility. Select System  
Settings, Power, Active Energy, and Capping  
Enabled.  
3. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
4. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
186 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance  
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information  
about Lenovo products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from  
Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for  
additional information about Lenovo and Lenovo products, what to do if you  
experience a problem with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is  
necessary.  
Before you call  
Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the  
problem yourself:  
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.  
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional  
devices are turned on.  
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the  
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is  
in the Hardware Maintenance Manual.  
v Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information, hints,  
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by using the information  
available on the Lenovo support site or by following the troubleshooting procedures  
that Lenovo provides in the documentation that is provided with your Lenovo  
product. The documentation that comes with Lenovo systems also describes the  
diagnostic tests that you can perform. Most systems, operating systems, and  
programs come with documentation that contains troubleshooting procedures and  
explanations of error messages and error codes. If you suspect a software problem,  
see the documentation for the operating system or program.  
Using the documentation  
Information about your Lenovo system and preinstalled software, if any, or optional  
device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That  
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files, and  
help files. Most of the documentation for your server is on the ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD provided with your server. See the troubleshooting information  
in your system documentation for instructions for using the diagnostics programs.  
The troubleshooting information or the diagnostics programs might tell you that you  
need additional or updated device drivers or other software. Lenovo maintains  
pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest technical information  
and download device drivers and updates. To access these pages, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support and follow the instructions.  
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web  
On the World Wide Web, the Lenovo Web site has up-to-date information about  
Lenovo systems, optional devices, services, and support. For general information  
about Lenovo products or to purchase Lenovo products, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com. For support on Lenovo products, go to  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Calling for service  
During the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through  
the Customer Support Center.  
These services are available during the warranty period:  
v Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with  
determining a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the  
problem.  
v Hardware repair - If the problem is caused by hardware under warranty, trained  
service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service.  
v Engineering Change management - There might be changes that are required  
after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller will make selected  
Engineering Changes (ECs) available that apply to your hardware.  
These items are not covered by the warranty:  
v Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or  
non-warranted Lenovo parts  
v Identification of software problem sources  
v Configuration of BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade  
v Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers  
v Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS)  
v Installation and maintenance of application programs  
Refer to the safety and warranty information that is provided with your computer for  
a complete explanation of warranty terms. You must retain your proof of purchase  
to obtain warranty service.  
For a list of service and support phone numbers for your country or region, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support and click Support phone list or refer to the safety  
and warranty information provided with your computer.  
Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. If the number for your  
country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing  
representative.  
If possible, be at your computer when you call. Have the following information  
available:  
v Machine type and model  
v Serial numbers of our hardware products  
v Description of the problem  
v Exact working of any error messages  
v Hardware and software configuration information  
Using other services  
If you travel with a Lenovo notebook computer or relocate your computer to a  
country where your desktop, notebook, or server machine type is sold, your  
computer might be eligible for International Warranty Service, which automatically  
entitles you to obtain warranty service throughout the warranty period. Service will  
be performed by service providers authorized to perform warranty service.  
188 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service methods and procedures vary by country, and some services might not be  
available in all countries. International Warranty Service is delivered through the  
method of service (such as depot, carry-in, or on-site service) that is provided in the  
servicing country. Service centers in certain countries might not be able to service  
all models of a particular machine type. In some countries, fees and restrictions  
might apply at the time of service.  
To determine whether your computer is eligible for International Warranty Service  
and to view a list of the countries where service is available, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support, click Warranty, and follow the instructions on the  
screen.  
For technical assistance with the installation of, or questions related to, Service  
Packs for your preinstalled Microsoft Windows® product, refer to the Microsoft  
Product Support Services Web site at http://www.support.microsoft.com/directory/,  
or you can contact the Customer Support Center. Some fees might apply.  
Purchasing additional services  
During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as  
support for hardware, operating systems, and application programs; network setup  
and configuration; upgraded or extended hardware repair services; and custom  
installations. Service availability and service name might vary by country or region.  
For more information about these services, go to the Lenovo Web site at  
Lenovo product service  
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
190 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B. Notices  
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document  
in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the  
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo  
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo  
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may  
be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the  
operation of any other product, program, or service.  
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter  
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any  
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:  
Lenovo (United States), Inc.  
1009 Think Place - Building One  
Morrisville, NC 27560  
U.S.A.  
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing  
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow  
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this  
statement may not apply to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.  
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be  
incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements  
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication  
at any time without notice.  
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or  
other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to  
persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change  
Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate  
as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights  
of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained  
in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in  
other operating environments may vary.  
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it  
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for  
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those  
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this  
Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.  
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled  
environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may  
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level  
systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on  
generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document  
should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.  
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries,  
or both:  
Lenovo  
The Lenovo logo  
ThinkServer  
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation  
in the United States, other countries, or both:  
v IBM®  
v ServeRAID  
Intel and Intel Xeon® are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other  
countries, or both.  
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States, other countries, or both.  
Adaptec and HostRAID are trademarks of Adaptec, Inc., in the United States, other  
countries, or both.  
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other  
countries, or both.  
Red Hat, the Red Hat “Shadow Man” logo, and all Red Hat-based trademarks and  
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., in the United States  
and other countries.  
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of  
others.  
Important notes  
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other  
factors also affect application performance.  
CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often  
less than the possible maximum.  
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,  
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for  
1 073 741 824 bytes.  
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands  
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible  
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.  
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any  
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest  
currently supported drives that are available from Lenovo.  
192 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an  
optional memory module.  
Lenovo makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-Lenovo  
products. Support (if any) for the non-Lenovo products is provided by the third party,  
not Lenovo.  
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include  
user manuals or all program functionality.  
Product recycling and disposal  
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national  
regulations. Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to  
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a  
variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist  
equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on Lenovo product  
recycling offerings can be found on Lenovo’s Internet site at:  
Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la  
normativa nacional o local aplicable. Lenovo recomienda a los propietarios de  
equipos de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus  
equipos cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. Lenovo dispone de una serie de  
programas y servicios de devolución de productos en varios países, a fin de ayudar  
a los propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar  
información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de Lenovo en el sitio web  
de Lenovo  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and  
Norway.  
This appliance is labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC  
concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive  
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as  
applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products  
to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end  
of life per this Directive.  
Appendix B. Notices 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remarque : Cette marque s’applique uniquement aux pays de l’Union Européenne  
et à la Norvège.  
L’etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de  
Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les  
dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers  
l’Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le  
produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin  
de vie.  
In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic  
equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or  
recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the  
WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted  
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the  
return, recycling, and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to  
minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to  
the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and  
treatment, contact your local Lenovo representative.  
Compliance with Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of  
Hazardous Substances  
Meets requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the  
Use of Certain Hazardous Substances In Electrical and Electronic Equipment  
(EEE).  
Türkiye EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygunluk Beyanı  
Bu Lenovo ürünü, T.C. Çevre ve Orman Bakanlığı'nın  
“Elektrik ve Elektronik Eşyalarda Bazı Zararlı Maddelerin  
Kullanımının Sınırlandırılmasına Dair Yönetmelik (EEE)”  
direktiflerine uygundur.  
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.  
194 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recycling statements for Japan  
Battery return program  
This product may contain a lithium or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual  
or service manual for specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or  
disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For  
information on disposal or batteries outside the United States, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment or contact your local waste disposal  
facility.  
For Taiwan: Please recycle batteries.  
Appendix B. Notices 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For the European Union:  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).  
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European  
Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries  
and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and  
recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European  
Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to  
be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.  
Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux  
directives européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs  
en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la  
marche à suivre en vigueue dans l'Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage  
des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses  
batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt  
récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme.  
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators  
are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end  
of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal  
concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users  
of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as  
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers  
for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer  
participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and  
accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence  
of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
For California:  
Perchlorate material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/  
hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.  
The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations  
Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate  
Materials. This product/part may include a lithium manganese dioxide battery which  
contains a perchlorate substance.  
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement  
The product is not suitable for use with visual display work place devices according  
to clause 2 of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.  
196 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der  
Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet.  
Electronic emission notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the  
interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to  
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television  
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or  
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement  
Notice to Customers  
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect  
connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council  
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any  
Appendix B. Notices 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Lenovo option cards  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Germany Class A compliance statement  
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:  
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen  
Verträglichkeit  
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG  
(früher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die  
Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.  
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu  
installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo  
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung  
für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung  
der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern  
ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.  
Deutschland:  
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von  
Betriebsmittein  
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
von Betriebsmitteln” EMVG (früher “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische  
Verträglichkeit von Geräten”). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie  
2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli  
2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten),  
bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für Geräte der  
Klasse A.  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das  
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die  
Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland)  
GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.  
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:  
198 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022  
Klasse A.  
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung  
kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom  
Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür  
aufzukommen.”  
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört  
sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und  
Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und Telekommunikation  
betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen  
Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4).  
Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der  
entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.  
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in  
den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
Taiwan Class A warning statement  
People's Republic of China Class A warning statement  
Appendix B. Notices 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Korea Class A warning statement  
200 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
cabling (continued)  
A
adapter  
CD drive  
ServeRAID-MR10i  
clearing  
components  
configuration  
ServeRAID-MR10is  
Advanced Settings Utility program  
configuration programs  
connector  
B
battery  
blue-screen capture feature  
boot manager program  
connectors  
control-panel assembly  
controller  
Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility  
cover  
C
cables  
cover, side  
creating  
cables, power and signal  
cabling  
© Lenovo 2009. Portions © IBM Corp. 2009.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
error codes and messages  
error symptoms  
D
DIMM installation sequence  
DIMMs  
diskette drive  
drive  
drives  
bay 1, 2, or 3  
bay 4, 5, 6, or 7  
hot-swap SAS  
hot-swap SATA  
Simple-swap SATA  
Ethernet  
controller  
DSA diagnostics  
dual inline memory module (DIMM)  
DVD drive  
extender card  
F
fan  
E
EasyStartup  
rear  
features  
eject button  
enabling  
202 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
firmware, server  
formatting  
in-band method  
installation order  
installing  
front USB connector assembly  
fan  
G
power supply  
H
hard disk drive  
installing options  
hard disk drives  
hot-plug adapter.  
hot-plug devices  
hot-swap drive  
integrated management module  
IP address  
backplane  
hot-swap drives, SAS or SATA  
J
jumper  
jumpers  
hot-swap fan  
hot-swap SAS drives  
hot-swap SATA drives  
K
I
IMM IP address  
L
LED  
Index 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEDs  
messages, error  
microprocessor  
LEDs and controls  
LEDs, EasyLED  
N
network operating-system (NOS) installation  
log  
O
obtaining  
one-slot  
optional device  
options  
M
memory  
memory installation sequence  
order of installation  
out-of-band method  
memory module  
memory modules  
P
password  
password, administrator  
menu choices  
messages  
204 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
password, power-on  
PCI  
PCI extender card  
ports  
R
RAID array  
RAS.  
recoverying the server firmware  
redundant array of independent disks (RAID)  
power and signal cables  
power supply  
remote presence feature  
removing  
non-hot-swap  
power supply cage assembly  
non-hot-swap  
power supply cage assembly  
problems  
replacing  
running  
S
safety information  
Index 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
safety information (continued)  
Setup Utility  
signal and power cables  
simple-swap drives  
SAS or SATA hot-swap drives  
SATA backplane  
Simple-swap SATA drives  
SATA simple-swap drives  
Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA)  
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)  
backplane  
starting  
supervisor password  
switches  
system board  
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)/SATA  
backplane  
server  
server controls and indicator  
server, backup firmware  
ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA controller  
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA controller  
ServeRAID-MR10is adapter  
ServeRAID-MR10is SAS/SATA controller  
T
tape drive  
thermal material  
206 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208 ThinkServer TD200 Types 3724, 3808, 3809, 3815, 3817, 3824, 3826, 3836: Installation and User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part Number: 44W2344  
Printed in USA  
(1P) P/N: 44W2344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Life Fitness Stepper Machine 90SW User Manual
Lincoln Automobile 2011 MKS User Manual
Lincoln Electric Welder IM311 E User Manual
Lincoln Electric Welding System IM703 A User Manual
Mace Security Camera CAM 90 User Manual
Makita Home Safety Product ML901 User Manual
Maytag Clothes Dryer MEDC400VW User Manual
McCulloch Lawn Mower M553CM User Manual
Mesa Boogie Stereo Amplifier Mark IV Amplifier User Manual
Metrologic Instruments Barcode Reader IS1650 User Manual